path: root/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/merlin.mbs

%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT -*- TeX -*- -*- DTX -*-
% File: merlin.mbs
%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung
% Max-Planck-Str. 2
% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
% Germany
% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de
%
% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
%
% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
%====================================================================
%       Master  Bibliography  Style
%    for customizing bibliographic style files (.bst)
%    with the help of     docstrip.tex
%    and the auxiliary program     makebst.tex
%--------------------------------------------------------------------
%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
%--------------------------------------------------------------------
%    This file supports numerical and author-year citation styles
%        for natbib, harvard, astronom, authordate, apalike
%    It also supports languages other than English
%--------------------------------------------------------------------
%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
%  (Alternatively, extract documentation driver with option `driver')
%====================================================================
%
%<*!tail>
% (The following notice appears in bst files generated from this file)
 % ===============================================================
 % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
 % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
 % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
 %
 % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
 % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
 % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
 % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
 % ===============================================================
 % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
%\fi
 % \ProvidesFile{merlin.mbs}[2007/04/24 4.20 (PWD, AO, DPC)]
%\iffalse
%</!tail>
%<*a&!a>
% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
%</a&!a>
%<*driver>
   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
   \usepackage{doc}%
   \raggedbottom
   \CodelineNumbered
   \RecordChanges
 %  Comment out next line to print coding
   \OnlyDescription
   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}

\begin{document}
   \DocInput{merlin.mbs}
\end{document}
%</driver>
%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
% \CharacterTable
%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
%
% \CheckSum{516}
% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
%
% \changes{1.0}{1993 Aug 16}{Initial version}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add multilingual capabilities}
% \changes{2.1--2.5}{1995 May 2}{Changes to \texttt{babel.mbs} parallel 1.3--1.7
%    in \texttt{genbst.mbs}}
% \changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Change documentation to \LaTeXe}
% \changes{1.3(2.1)a}{1994 Sep 1}{Alter wording of article title capitalization
%          choice}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Add full author name possibilities}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Fix up some punctuations}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Add possibility to put titles in quotes}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Accommodate new \texttt{harvard.sty}}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Add full names for \texttt{natbib} v5.3}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)a}{1994 Oct 11}{Add option so year can contain any text}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Allow edited by to be in parentheses}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Allow (year) to have no punctuation
%     following}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)c}{1995 Jan 20}{Journal volume numbers with more choice}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Date with no punctuation preceding it}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Editor names can be reversed like authors'}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Can abbreviate `edited by' to `ed(s).'}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Released version}
% \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Add \texttt{seq-key} option}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Becomes \texttt{merlin.mbs}, with language
%      support in additional files}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Allow full author names to be reversed}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add \texttt{isbn} field option}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Citation names can be bold or small caps}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 8}{Colon and space may follow year}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Names can be reversed, dotless intials}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 17}{Volume, number can be followed by semi-colon}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Allow word editor or ed to be in parentheses}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Abbreviated journal names can have dots removed}
% \changes{3.1}{1995 May 4}{Fix `edited by' so it is not abbreviated
%         automatically with `editor'}
% \changes{3.1}{1995 May 6}{Re-do head/tail options to allow easy update of
%         older \texttt{.dbj} files}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Minimum number of authors can be up to 6, not  5}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Allow date as part of journal spec., for medical
%         journals}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Suppress `pages' and `pp'}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Allow date to be `1994 Jul', with or without dot}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Authors as Jones C.T.}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 16}{Sort without \emph{von} part}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jul 31}{Release as version 3.2}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Extra labels put in braces so they are treated
%     as one unit by natbib}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Publisher's address can precede name}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Add full authors only if different from short list}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Add number of references as argument to
%      \texttt{thebibliography} environment}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Fix placement of \texttt{bolden} in
%      \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add possibility of date between volume and pages}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Word `and' can be in normal font in citations}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 4}{Tech Reports to have titles like books}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Delimit \texttt{\char`\\harvardyearright} properly}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Add option to sort by year (numerical only)}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 12}{Allow multiple journal-name files}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 16}{Allow months in dates even for author-year}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{Fix sorting bug for limited number of authors}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 30}{Add \texttt{named} format for author--year cites}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 2}{Blocks can be separated by semi-colons}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Journal names in normal font}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Volume subnumber added to pages}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 24}{Book pages in parentheses}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Put Jr at end for AGU author style}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Put `and' in same font in list and citation}
% \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 30}{Allow `et al' to be in normal font}
% \changes{3.6a}{1996 Feb 1}{Fix bugs with \texttt{xand} option}
% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 2}{Fix small caps with NFSS}
% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Fix clash of \texttt{emphasize} and
%      \texttt{purify\$}}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add \texttt{alpha}-type style}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 1}{Style alpha is never unsorted}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Allow blanks between blocks}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Publisher in parentheses}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 15}{Allow author-year to be sorted by year}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 16}{Cited `and' resets only one attribute}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Allow date to be between volume and number}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 17}{Add \texttt{\char`\\natexlab} for \texttt{natbib} 6.3}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Fix coding for adding `page' to journals}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add `volume' to journals}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Remove word `in'}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Place publisher before chapter/pages}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 25}{Allow period after date}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Commas between blocks, except for article titles
%         where period comes}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 12}{Allow comma before date}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Reorganize incollection organization and
%             publisher}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Allow edition to come before publisher}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Allow author--year to be in citation order}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Publisher, address, date can all be in
%            parentheses}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 18}{Remove extraneous hyphen before
%           \texttt{\char`\\getans}}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Allow pages at end before notes}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Fix bug with quoted titles when title missing}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Fix bug that put comma before publisher in
%           parentheses}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Allow AGU author style with full names}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Allow dash for repeated authors, periods
%   before notes}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Apr 25}{Change case of first note word if mid-sentence}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Option to break long page numbers}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Option for titles in guillemets}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Option to use underlining for emphasis}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Reorganize options for year in journal spec}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Multiple options in menu}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 10}{Fonts for names: can exclude first names,
% use-defined font allowed, improved coding for `and' and `et~al.'}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Use \texttt{format.date} consistently in place
%   of \texttt{year} alone}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Suppress ISBN number when certain crossrefs
%    are present}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Add option for comma between year and pages}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Apr 20}{Bug with minimum 6 authors corrected}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{url} field for all styles}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Suppress months in numerical mode}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Author limitation now 99}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{annote} field and annotation}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{issn} field}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Correct spelling of `guillimet'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Make \textsl{et~al.} a variable \texttt{bbl.etal}}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{language} field}
% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Oct 16}{Add html output possibilities}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress edition conversion in English}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Conf. booktitles are upright if book titles are}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Various extra options for book pages,
%         inproceedings, mainly for MPG Jahrbuch}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Jan 13}{For html, newblock just adds period, no new line}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 1}{Do edition suppression properly}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 26}{Fix font handling of names}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 26}{Test for multipages for word `page(s)' in journals}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Missing years may be left blank, not just ????}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{When key replaces author, leave year blank}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 Jul 20}{AO: %Arthur Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com)
%      Add new entries: collaboration, eid, eprint, numpages, per option
%      \texttt{revdata}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 Jul 20}{AO: Add reference component tags (\texttt{bibinfo}
%      and friends)}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Sept 17}{PWD: incorporate AO's changes with moderations}
% \changes{4.00}{2000 Jan 21}{PWD: add \texttt{archive} field}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{PWD: Fix improper \texttt{change.case\$} and
%     \texttt{bibinfo.check} ordering}
% \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Fix bug with `in' with articles}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add \texttt{seq-yrr} for reversed year ordering}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add \texttt{thtit-x} to suppress thesis titles}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add line to define \texttt{natexlab} in aux file for harvard}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: bug fix when both \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-jnl} given}
% \changes{4.04}{2002 Sep 13}{PWD: add support for Slovene/Slovenian language}
% \changes{4.05}{2002 Oct 21}{PWD: bug fix in \texttt{inproceedings} with
%         \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-beg}}
% \changes{4.06}{2003 Apr 2}{PWD: add \texttt{nmd-2} and \texttt{nmd-3} for use with \texttt{nmdash}}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{PWD: add DOI}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 June 3}{PWD: use \texttt{\protect\bslash providecommand}
%    instead of \TeX\ commands, but provide \texttt{noprov} option to undo it.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 June 3}{PWD: make \texttt{eid} available not just for Rev\TeX}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 June 11}{PWD: add \texttt{pg-pre} for total book pages location}
% \changes{4.11}{2003 June 23}{PWD: fix DOI to have no space after colon}
% \changes{4.11}{2003 June 23}{PWD: add options \texttt{ser-vol} and \texttt{ser-ed}}
% \changes{4.11a}{2003 Aug 19}{PWD: fix bug with \texttt{ser-ed} option}
% \changes{4.12}{2003 Sep 8}{PWD: rename \texttt{noprov} to \texttt{plntx} for Plain \TeX\ compatibility}
% \changes{4.12a}{2003 Nov 6}{PWD: fix bug in which comma separators go on wrong side; change was
%                             originally made in \texttt{makebst} but not in \texttt{merlin}}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: fix some bugs in \texttt{inbook} and \texttt{incollection}}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: add option \texttt{nm-rvcx}}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: add option \texttt{tit-col} for colon after titles}
% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{PWD: add option \texttt{nm-rvvc}, spaceless initials with comma}
% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{PWD: add option \texttt{etal-xc} to suppress comma before et al.}
% \changes{4.15}{2006 Jan 4}{PWD: add option \texttt{pres} for conference talks, presentations}
% \changes{4.16}{2006 Feb 15}{PWD: fix bug in \texttt{proceedings} that suppress number/series at times}
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{PWD: add option to allow more than one author in cites before et al.}
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 24}{PWD: allow variable number of authors before truncating citation}
%
% \pagestyle{myheadings}
% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{A General Master Bibliography Style}
%
% \title{{\bfseries A Master Bibliographic Style File}\\
%      for numerical, author--year, multilingual applications}
%
% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
%
% \GetFileInfo{merlin.mbs}
% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate
%   \thanks{Work on \texttt{custom-bib}~4.00 was supported by the
%          American Physical Society}}
%
% \maketitle
%
% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
%
% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
%
% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
%
% \section{Introduction}
% A problem facing users of \btx{} is that there is no standard for
% formatting lists of references. Publishers and journals insist
% on completely arbitrary placement of commas, colons, and ordering of
% entries. Furthermore, author--year styles of citations are supported by
% certain special \LaTeX{} packages, but each for only a very limited
% number of bibliographic styles. Finally, most such style files are for
% English only, and any adaptations to other languages must duplicate the
% entire spectrum of such files.
%
% All of these obstacles are in principle easily overcome by simply
% reprogramming \btx{} by means of an appropriate \emph{bibliographic style
% file} (extension \texttt{.bst}). \btx{} is in fact extremely flexible;
% unfortunately its programming language is very low-level, permitting only
% the most basic of hacks for the normal user.
%
% The solution to this is a \emph{generic} or \emph{master bibliographic
% style file} (extension \texttt{.mbs}) containing \dtx{} options for
% alternative coding. By selecting the desired options, one can customize a
% \texttt{.bst} file to one's needs.
%
% This file, \texttt{\filename}, is my latest version of a general-purpose
% \texttt{.mbs} file to meet as many bibliographic needs as possible.
% It was originally assembled from Oren Patashnik's standard files {\tt
% plain.bst} and \texttt{unsrt.bst}, plus his non-standard file {\tt
% apalike.bst}, a very basic author--year citation style.
% It has since evolved extensively as I have added features found in
% available \texttt{.bst} files, and those demanded by publishers or
% suggested to me by many user/contributors.
%
% To produce a customized bibliographic style (\texttt{.bst}) file from this
% master file, simply \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} the `program' \texttt{makebst.tex}.
% When asked for the name of the master file, answer with
% \begin{quote}\tt\filename\end{quote}
% and then reply to the questions in the following menus. The last question
% is whether you want to generate the \texttt{.bst} file right away.
%
% More details on this process and on the options available are to be found
% in the rest of this article.
%
% \section{History of this File}
%
% Since the first release of this generic file, in November 1993, under the
% name \texttt{genbst.mbs}, I have received innumerable
% suggestions for additions, most of which I have tried to include. Often
% this has resulted in reorganizing the coding, and adding new functions.
% The resulting \texttt{.bst} files are now quite different from those of
% Patashnik, although the underlying ideas are the same.
%
% A second version was released shortly afterwards that paralleled the first
% one except that it included support for languages other than English.
% That file was named \texttt{babel.mbs}, following the \texttt{babel}
% system of Johannes Braams. Although I always viewed it as version 2 of
% \texttt{genbst.mbs}, all additions to the one were also included in the
% other. This of course was tedious and prone to error. I looked forward to
% the day when \texttt{babel.mbs} would become the only supported version.
% The reason I was reluctant to do that before was that the overhead per
% language was fairly high, and I dreaded to think how large the file would
% become when 20 or 30 languages were added.
%
% I then found a way to put the language definitions into separate files,
% one per language. This means that new languages do not burden the basic
% file, and that users need only keep those support files that might
% interest him or her. New ones may also be made up locally by hacking an
% existing language definition file. (The file \texttt{english.mbs} is
% supplied only for this purpose.)
%
% For this reason, \texttt{\filename} was released as version~3 of
% \texttt{genbst.mbs} and \texttt{babel.mbs}. In spite of the new name, it
% should be regarded as their direct successor. Needless to say, this means
% that the earlier two \texttt{.mbs} files will no longer be maintained.
%
% To include language support, all explicit English words like
% \textsl{editor} and \textsl{chapter} have been replaced by functions
% whose definitions may be altered in the resulting \texttt{.bst} file
% (less desirable method) or which may be redefined by an external
% language definition file (preferred method).  Alternatively, one can select
% the pseudo-language named \texttt{babel} which inserts \LaTeX{} commands
% for the explicit words, the definitions of which must be
% contained in a file called {\tt babelbst.tex}. Only the languages English
% and \texttt{babel} are included internally to \texttt{\filename}; all
% others are contained in external language definition files.
%
% Another new feature is the possibility of including a file containing
% prestored shorthand designations for certain journal names. Such a file
% is provided for physics journals, but others could be made up using this
% one as a model. See Section~\ref{sec:jnames}.
%
% To take advantage of these external files, one must use
% \texttt{makebst} version~3; \texttt{\filename} may still be used with
% earlier versions, but without the external files.
%
% Version~4 arose out of a project by David Carlisle who created a variant
% of \texttt{\filename} for REV\TeX\ and the American Physical Society with
% the help of Mark Doyle of the APS. The main purpose was to add extra
% fields (see page~\pageref{sec:revtex}) that were needed. Subsequently
% Arthur Ogawa revised the code considerably, making it more rational,
% fixing some bugs and adding some extra features.
%
% I was then asked to incorporate all these changes into the official
% version of \texttt{\filename}. This required much debugging, since the
% Ogawa's rationalization upset several of the delicate interplays between
% various options. The result is version~4.0, the work on which has been
% supported by the American Physical Society.
%
% Version~4.0 contains the REV\TeX\ extra fields and the
% Carlisle-Doyle-Ogawa rewrites. An additional feature that derived from
% Carlisle's work on REV\TeX\ is the tagging of the text entries in the
% bibliography. This means the volume number is given as
% |\bibinfo{volume}{5}|. Normally only the number 5 is printed, but another
% program could use this to reconstruct the original database entries.
%
% Arthur Ogawa also added some features to \texttt{makebst} to provide a more
% verbose protocol. As a result, version~4 of \texttt{\filename} can only be
% used with version~4 of \texttt{makebst}. Older versions of \texttt{\filename}
% will still function with the newer \texttt{makebst}. Also, \texttt{.dbj}
% files created with older versions should still produce the same results with
% \texttt{\filename}~4.
%
% \def\temp{merlin.mbs}\ifx\temp\filename
% This file is now named after the legendary magician in the hope that it
% can produce wonders by incanting the right magic formulas. However, one
% should bear in mind that even Merlin was not omnipotent. It would be too
% much to hope that all bibliographic wishes will be fulfilled quickly and
% easily, but we shall try as best we can. Watch the wizardry at work!
% \fi
%
% \section{About Master Bibliographic Style Files}
%
% For details about how master bibliography style files are to be
% constructed, see the documentation on \texttt{makebst}. Here only a
% rough overview is given.
%
% \subsection{The \dtx{} Program}
% The \dtx{} program, written by Frank Mittelbach, is now a fundamental
% part of the \LaTeXe{} installation. Its original purpose is to remove
% comment lines from documented files, but has the secondary function of
% selecting alternative lines of coding.
%
% A master \btx{} bibliographic style file is one that, when processed by
% \dtx{} with selected options, produces a regular \btx{} \texttt{.bst}
% file with the desired features.
%
% In this sense, \dtx{} functions something like a C preprocessor. In fact,
% Oren Patashnik's original \texttt{.bst} files were all produced from a single
% source file by means of the preprocessor. The advantage of \dtx{} is that
% it is portable to all installations with \TeX.
%
% \subsection{The \dtx{} Batch Job}
%
% The \dtx{} program can be run either interactively, where the user must
% answer questions via the keyboard, or by means of a batch job where all
% the inputs are prepared in a file beforehand. For producing a \btx{}
% style file from a master file, the batch job method is the only feasible
% one, simply because of the large number of options available. (There is
% another reason for employing a batch job: the interactive method adds an
% |\endinput| command at the end, something that \btx{} will protest
% about.)
%
% The batch job files in general do not have any particular extension but I
% use \texttt{.dbj} for \emph{\dtx{} batch job}. These files are useful
% because they document the options used to produce the \texttt{.bst} file,
% and they may be edited to experiment with alternative options.
%
% \subsection{The \texttt{makebst} Program}
%
% It is possible to make up a batch job file by hand using the option
% information listed in Section~\ref{sec:options}, but my accompanying
% program \texttt{makebst} simplifies the task considerably. It reads menu
% information in the master file itself in order to present the user with
% an interactive list of choices, translating the answers into appropriate
% options that are then written to a batch job file.
%
% To run it, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex} with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and
% answer the questions. The first of these is whether you want some
% instructions or not, and the second is the name of the \texttt{.mbs} that
% you want to use. The next query is about the name of the desired
% \texttt{.bst} file (which will also be the root name of the batch job).
% After that, all further questions come from menu information in the
% master file.
%
% At the very end, \texttt{makebst} asks if it should run the batch job for
% you. Isn't that a fine service?
%
% \section{Multilingual Adaptation}
% The original \texttt{.bst} files from Oren Patashnik contain explicit
% English words that are output into the final text. Since \LaTeX{} is
% increasingly being used for other languages, and since the official
% version since December 1991 also uses macros in place of explicit words,
% it seems appropriate for \btx{} to follow suit.
%
% In this master bibliographic style file {\tt\filename}, all explicit
% words have been replaced by functions: e.g., the word \textsl{editor} has
% become the function \texttt{bbl.editor}. Depending on the language option
% chosen, this function is defined to be the text {\tt"editor"},
% {\tt"Redakteur"}, or {\tt"redacteur"}, for English, German, and French,
% respectively.
%
% There is another special `language' called \texttt{babel} that instead inserts
% the text |"\bbleditor{}"|; the definitions of these \LaTeX{} commands
% must be in a separate file named \texttt{babelbst.tex} that is read in at
% the start of the bibliography.
%
% Only English and \texttt{babel} are supported directly in
% \texttt{\filename}; all other language definitions are contained in
% separate definition files, e.g., \texttt{french.mbs}, \texttt{german.mbs}.
%
% The language selection is made during the \texttt{makebst} run, which
% asks for the name of the language definition file as the first menu item. If
% either English or \texttt{babel} is wanted, reply with the default, which
% is \texttt{\filename} itself; otherwise give the name of the desired
% language file.
%
% \begin{quote}\slshape
%   \textbf{Note:} the language definition files can only be used with
%   \texttt{makebst} version~3 or later, and
%
%   with an external definition file, the \dtx{} run requires two passes
%   through \texttt{\filename}, doubling the processing time.
% \end{quote}
%
% Apart from the language adaptation of the whole bibliography, there is also
% the possibility of switching languages for individual references, so as to
% hyphenate the title properly. This is done with the \texttt{language} field
% and the \verb!\setlanguage! command.
%
% \subsection{Adding a New Language Definition File}
%
% To create a new language definition file, simply take one of the existing
% ones, like \texttt{english.mbs}, and replace the explicit English words
% with their translations. There are, however, a number of points that can
% complicate this procedure.
%
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item
%   Do not forget to change the documentation in the file, especially
%   version number, date, author.
%
% \item
%   There are option menus that need to be translated too. It might also be
%   desirable to add or remove options. In most cases, the options in the
%   language files involve possible abbreviations, like
%   \begin{quote}
%      \verb!\mes{^^JABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}!\\
%      \verb!\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}!\\
%      \verb!\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}!\\
%      \verb!\getans!
%   \end{quote}
%
%   In this example, the option \texttt{pp} appears later in the definition
%   \begin{quote}
%      \verb!FUNCTION {bbl.pages}!\\
%      \verb+%<!pp>{ "pages" }+\\
%      \verb!%<pp>{ "pp." }!
%   \end{quote}
%   This a \emph{local} option, that only affects the coding in the definition
%   file. It is possible to add more local options.
%
% \item
%   However, all options, whether activated by the main file or by the
%   definition file, apply to both. In other words, there really is no such
%   thing as a local option. In the above example, \texttt{pp} is only
%   local because it is never used in \texttt{\filename}.
%
% \item
%   Add the name of the language as an option, with
%   \begin{quote}
%      \verb!\mes{^^JOptions for ENGLISH}!\\
%      \verb!\wr{\spsp\spsp english,\pc: English language}!
%   \end{quote}
%   (This is how options are added without |\optdef| and |\getans|.) The
%   main file just might recognize it in order to take some
%   language-specific action. The least it should do is add a comment at
%   the start of the \texttt{.bst} file stating for which language it is to
%   be used.
%
% \item
%   There could be some problems with edition numbers due to language
%   dependent ways of treating ordinal numbers (1st, 2nd, 3rd in English;
%   1$^{\mbox{\scriptsize re}}$, 2$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$,
%   3$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$ in French; 1., 2., 3., in German). Some
%   accommodation already exists for the oddball language English, and
%   further hacking may be needed for others.
%
% \item
%   If there should be any need for a double-quote character in
%   the translations (German needs it for umlauts) then there is trouble
%   because the \btx{} strings do not allow it. Instead, use the command
%   |\qq|, as in the German word |F\qq{u}nfte| for {\sl F\"unfte} (fifth).
%   It is then vital to add the option \texttt{umlaut} with
%   \begin{quote}
%      \verb!\wr{\spsp\spsp umlaut,\pc: Activate umlaut command}!
%   \end{quote}
%
% Bernd Raichle points out that |\^^b| can be used in place of |\"|
% within \btx{} code. One can thus replace |F\qq{u}nfte| with |F\^^b unfte|
% and do away with the \texttt{umlaut} option.
%
% \end{enumerate}
%
% \subsection{Changing \texttt{babelbst.tex} for a New Language}
%
% Alternatively, a new language can be added by
% modifying the file \texttt{babelbst.tex} and selecting the language {\tt
% babel} for the \texttt{.bst} file. If this is the only language to be used,
% then just change the English words in the definitions.
%
% However, some form of switching would be more desirable. With \TeX\
% version 3, there is a |\language| parameter to control the hyphenation
% patterns, and this could be used to select the correct language. For
% example, if language 0 is English and language 1 German, then put the
% English version of \texttt{babelbst.tex} into \texttt{englbst.tex} and the
% German
% version in \texttt{germbst.tex}. Then \texttt{babelbst.tex} could contain:
% \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
% \ifcase\language \input{englbst} \or \input{germbst}
%   \else \input{englbst} \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{quote}
%
% This is of course installation dependent.
%
% \subsection{Extracting the Sample \texttt{babelbst.tex} File}
%
% A sample \texttt{babelbst.tex} (for English) is contained in this master
% file.  Extract it with \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}. It may be
% edited (and possibly renamed) for other languages as needed.
%
% \subsection{Problem with Edition Numbers}
% Something to note here is the ordinal numbers for editions. \btx{}
% demands that the field \texttt{edition} be given in the database as a word
% \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc., or as \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd},
% etc. This is bad policy
% because it is language dependent. So what I do is to test for the words
% \textsl{first} through \textsl{fifth} (case independently) and replace them
% with language-dependent equivalents. If the {\tt<ord>} option is selected,
% these equivalents are ordinal numbers for that language. Any other words
% cannot be interpreted and must be printed as is.
%
% However, if the \texttt{edition} is given as a number, with or without
% following letters, then the numbers 1 through 5 are replaced by their
% words; any higher numbers just have the ordinal ending (\textsl{th}
% in English) added to them.
%
% These numbers are only used with the word \textsl{edition} or
% its equivalent in other languages, so the translators need
% to provide only the one gender, e.g., feminine for both German and
% French.
%
%
% \section{Prestoring Names of Journals}\label{sec:jnames}
%
% The standard \texttt{.bst} files contain the names of some 20 journals
% in the field of computing, stored as macros for easy reference within the
% database \texttt{.bib} files. For example, the \textsl{Journal of
% Computer and System Sciences} can be referred to as \texttt{jcss}.
% With the option \texttt{jabr} (for journal abbreviation) this same
% shorthand produces \textsl{J.~Comput. Syst. Sci.}.
%
% Some \texttt{.bst} files for physics journals include additional journal
% names, and it is conceivable that other faculties might wish to prepare
% their own such lists, with each name present in a full or abbreviated
% form. Such an external file can now be added with \texttt{\filename} and
% \texttt{makebst} version~3.
%
% As a model, I supply a file \texttt{physjour.mbs} with the names of
% physics journals which I have taken from other \texttt{.bst} files.
% I also have a file \texttt{geojour.mbs} with the names of geophysics
% journals, and a contributed file \texttt{photjour.mbs} containing names of
% optics journals.
%
% In fact, version~3.5 can even include multiple journal-name files.
% Thus one can decide whether to include both, one, or none of the above
% files.
%
% \section{HTML Output}
% There is an option \texttt{html} to create a \texttt{.bst} file producing
% hypertext (HTML) output instead of the regular \LaTeX\ code. This is still
% experimental. The resulting \btx\ output will still be a file with extension
% \texttt{.bbl} and will contain the \LaTeX\ special characters, like |\"a| for
% \"a. One must go over the output to convert such characters to the HTML
% equivalents, and to remove curly braces. Only then can it be renamed
% \texttt{.html}.
%
% Three possible lists are offered:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item a simple paragraph for each entry,
% \item a numbered list,
% \item a description list with the key as the label.
% \end{itemize}
%
% \section{Updating Older \texttt{.dbj} Files}\label{sec:update}
% If you have existing \texttt{.dbj} files for generating \texttt{.bst}
% files from the older version \texttt{genbst.mbs}, these may be run with
% \texttt{\filename} by simply changing the name of the source
% \texttt{.mbs} file. For example, where the older \texttt{.dbj} file contains
% the line
% \begin{quote}
% |\generateFile{mystyle.bst}{f}{\from{genbst.mbs}{%|
% \end{quote}
% edit the file so that \texttt{genbst.mbs} is replaced by
% \texttt{\filename}. The resulting \texttt{mystyle.bst} file will then be
% an updated version of the older one, containing all the same features.
%
% Version~4 of \texttt{\filename} can only be used with version~4 of
% \texttt{makebst}, whereas older versions of \texttt{\filename} will still
% function with the newer \texttt{makebst}. Also, \texttt{.dbj} files created
% with older versions should still produce the same results with
% \texttt{\filename}~4, albeit with different coding.
%
% \section{Acknowledgements}
% I wish to thank all the people who have taken the trouble to send me
% suggestions or special requests. Admittedly, it has been out of
% self-interest on their part, since they had bibliographic needs to be
% met. And I have often questioned the need for many of their demands. Yet,
% that is part of the bibliographic jungle that I am trying to eliminate.
% If I thought that bibliographies were arbitrarily formatted before I
% started this project, I have more than sufficient confirmation since
% then. The fault lies not with the poor contributors, but with the
% publishers who cannot agree on a decent standard.
%
% I want to thank Frank Mittelbach, not only for creating \dtx{}
% in the first place, but also for sending me his bibliographic requirements,
% and for suggesting an improvement to \texttt{makebst}.
%
% David Carlisle has added the REV\TeX\ fields and |\bibinfo| tagging in a
% special variant of \texttt{\filename}; Arthur Ogawa then incorporated
% them into the main file, and overhauled much of the coding to make it
% more legible and rational.
%
% I especially wish to thank Mark Doyle and the American Physical
% Society for supporting the work on \texttt{custom-bib}~4.0.
%
% And finally, all of us must thank Oren Patashnik for providing \btx;
% without its flexibility and programmability (in spite of the complexity
% of the language) the master bibliographic styles would not be possible at
% all.
%
% \section{The Options}\label{sec:options}
% Here I present a list of all the \dtx{} options that are
% available in this file {\tt\filename}.
% The normal user can skip this section since he will probably make use
% of the menus via \texttt{makebst}. These are described in
% Section~\ref{sec:menu}. The menus provide much more informative prompts
% than the heavily abbreviated option names listed here. In other words,
% the options described in this section are meant for internal (programmer)
% usage, while the normal interface for the user is the menus.
%
% I have tried to avoid
% conflicts with mutually exclusive options by always letting one dominate if
% more than one has been specified. Such options have the same prefix, such
% as \texttt{nm-rev} and \texttt{nm-init}.
% If one uses \texttt{makebst} to produce the
% \dtx{} batch job, then it is impossible to give mutually
% exclusive options unless one edits the batch file oneself afterwards.
% (Anything is possible with computer freaks!)
%
% Most mutually exclusive options have the same prefix before the hyphen.
%
% \newenvironment{opt}{%
% \begin{list}{}{\labelwidth2cm \leftmargin2.5cm \labelsep1em \rightmargin0pt
%  \def\makelabel##1{\ttfamily##1 \hfill}}}{\end{list}}
% \textbf{Citation style:} whether or not a numerical or author--year system
% is to be used.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is numerical, standard \LaTeX, as for {\tt
%           plain.bst}.\\
%           |\bibitem{key}...|
% \item[cite] special for listing entire databases; the cite key is used
%             as the label so it may be listed.\\
%             |\bibitem[key]{key}...|
% \item[ay] for author--year style of citations. Various forms of |\bibitem|
%           are provided under this option, to support different types
%           of \LaTeX{} styles for interfacing with the author--year system.
% \item[alph] for \texttt{alpha.bst} style of citations; essentially numerical
%           but an abbreviation of the author names plus year is used as
%           the label. First three letters of single author, or first letters
%           of first three authors.
% \item[alf-1] with \texttt{alph}, uses first three letters of first author's
%           name, regardless of how many authors.
% \item[alf-f] with \texttt{alph}, uses first author's whole name.
% \end{opt}
%
% For numerical style, one can select the HTML option, to output a
% hypertext file instead of a \LaTeX\ one.
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] normal \LaTeX\ output;
% \item[html] for HTML output, one reference per paragraph
% \item[htlist] (with \texttt{html}) outputs to a numbered list;
% \item[htdes] (with \texttt{html}) outputs description list, with the key.
% \end{opt}
%
% If \texttt{ay} has been selected, then the type of author--year interface
% is selectable. Some of these, like \texttt{natbib} and \texttt{harvard}
% exist in two versions because of updates in these systems.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is the system I invented for my \texttt{natbib.sty}.\\
%            |\bibitem[author(year)]{key}...|
% \item[nat] for extended format of \texttt{natbib.sty} version 5.3\\
%            |\bibitem[author(year)full author]{key}...|
% \item[alk] for the \texttt{apalike.sty} of Oren Patashnik and related
%            systems\\
%            |\bibitem[author, year]{key}...|
% \item[har] for the Harvard family of styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}).\\
%            |\harvarditem[short]{long}{year}{key}...|
% \item[harnm] for the extended Harvard family, containing some extra commands
%            used by \LaTeXe\ version 2.0.3 of \texttt{harvard.sty}
% \item[ast] for astronomy family of styles (with \texttt{astron.sty}).\\
%            |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{author}{year}]{key}...|
% \item[cay] for the Chicago family of styles (with \texttt{chicago.sty}).\\
%            |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{long}{short}{year}]{key}...|
% \item[nmd] for the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}).\\
%            |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{author}{year}]{key}...|
% \item[cn] for the ``author--date'' group of styles (with {\tt
%            authordate1-4.sty})\\
%            |\bibitem[\protect\citename{author, }year]{key}...|
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Sequence:} the order in which the references are listed.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]      default is alphabetical by all authors, date, title
% \item[seq-yr]  order by year (ascending), authors, title
% \item[seq-yrr]  order by year (descending), authors, title
% \item[seq-no]  sequence by citation order
% \item[seq-lab] (author--year) by label, date, title (means that Daly
%                precedes Daly and Williams, precedes Daly et al.)
% \item[seq-key] (author--year) like \texttt{seq-lab} except that for
%                identical authors and year, the cite keyword is used
%                instead of the title
% \item[vonx]    ignore \emph{von} part of name when ordering (default is
%                to consider \emph{von} as part of the whole surname)
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Language selection:} the translations of certain explicit words.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]      default is English, for \textsl{and}, \textsl{chapter},
%                  \textsl{editor}, etc.;
% \item[babel]     replace words with \LaTeX{} commands that are defined
%                  in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex};
% \item[lang]     adds the \texttt{language} field for switching language
%                 for one reference only by means of the \verb!\setlanguage!
%                 command in \texttt{babel}.
% \end{opt}
%
% If one of the external language definition files is used, then the name of
% its language should be in the list of active options. Many other language
% names are already included as options in this main file simply for the
% purpose of adding a comment at the start of the \texttt{.bst} file.
%
% The \texttt{language} field is intended to allow the hyphenation patterns
% to be switched temporarily so that titles can be set in the original
% language.
%
% \textbf{Annotation:}
% annotations are added either by means of the \texttt{annote} field, or
% with a \texttt{.tex} file of the same name as the citation key.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]   no annotations
% \item[annote] annotations enabled, with \texttt{annote} field.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Presentations:}
% add a non-standard type to handle talks (presentations). This is similar to the
% \texttt{inproceedings} but without \texttt{booktitle} and with the presenting
% author in bold face. This author is specified by the \texttt{key} entry, which
% is that author's position in the author list (1, 2, \dots). The type of presentation
% (oral or poster) is specified by the entry \texttt{type}. The date without year is given
% in \texttt{month}, which must be present.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]  no presentations
% \item[pres] include a \texttt{presentation} type
% \item[pres-bf] (with \texttt{pres}) to put speaker in bold face
% \item[pres-it] (with \texttt{pres}) to put speaker in italics
% \item[pres-sc] (with \texttt{pres}) to put speaker in small caps
% \end{opt}
% Without any of the extra font options, the speaker's name is not highlighted.
%
% \textbf{Missing names:}
% If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files
% use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the
% entries.
%
% For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the
% reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can
% suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7)
% to print only that key text as a code designation for the work.
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] year is inserted in the labels when \texttt{key} replaces authors
% \item[keyxyr] year is left blank in this case
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Names formatting:} how initials and surnames are to be combined.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is full names, given names first
% \item[nm-revf]  full names, surname first
% \item[nm-init]  initials plus surname
% \item[nm-rev]   surname plus initials
% \item[nm-rev1]  surname plus initials (1st name only) then initials
%                 plus surname
% \item[nm-revv1] same as \texttt{nm-rev1} but with full names
% \item[nm-rv]    as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without dots
% \item[nm-rvvc]  as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without spaces
% \item[nm-rvv]   as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without spaces or comma
% \item[nm-rvx]   as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without dots or spaces
% \item[nm-rvcx]  as \texttt{nm-rvx}, but with comma after surname
% \item[ed-rev]   editors' names in collections are reversed the same as authors'
% \item[ed-au]    editors are formatted with same routine as authors; this
%                 is an alias for \texttt{ed-rev}, which is kept only for
%                 compatibility
% \item[aunm-semi] a semi-colon is placed between author names instead of
%                  a comma
% \item[aunm-sl]  a slash is placed between author names instead of a comma
% \item[nmdash]   repeated author/editor names replaced by dash
% \item[nmd-2]    with \texttt{nmdash}, uses 2 em dashes
% \item[nmd-3]    with \texttt{nmdash}, uses 3 em dashes
% \item[jnrlab]   include the junior part of name in citations (normally
%                 appears only in reference listing)
% \item[jnrlst]   with one of the \texttt{nm-rev} type options, puts the
%                 junior part last, after the (reversed) first name
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Number of names in bibliography:} normally all names listed (in reference list)
% \begin{opt}
% \item[nmlm]     limit number of names
% \item[x1...x90]  (with \texttt{nmlm}) maximum number of names to appear;
%                  for over 9, give the tens and units separately, as
%                  \texttt{x20,x5} for 25
% \item[m1...m90]  (with \texttt{nmlm}) minimum number before \textsl{et al.}
%                   written;
%                 no check for consistency is taken; one \texttt{x} and
%                 one \texttt{m} number must be given, and {\tt x}$\le${\tt m}
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Number of names in citation:} before \textsl{et al.}
%
% The default is to cite one or two names at most, but for three or more, to
% cite only one name with \textsl{et~ al.}
% \begin{opt}
% \item[mcite] to change the default
% \item[mct-1...mct-5] (with \texttt{mcite}) number of names preceding \textsl{et~al.}
% \item[mct-x2...mct-x5] (with \texttt{mcite}) max number of authors without truncating
% \end{opt}
% The default is equivalent to \texttt{mct-1} and \texttt{mct-x2}.
%
% \textbf{Names font:} in the reference list
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is names in normal typeface
% \item[nmft]     names are in some special font
% \item[nmfted]   editors' names in collections also get special fonts
% \item[nmft-sc]  names in small caps
% \item[nmft-it]  names in italics
% \item[nmft-bf]  names in bold
% \item[nmft-def]  names in user defined font |\bibnamefont{}|.
% \item[nmand-rm] `and' in normal font, not same as authors'.
% \item[fnm-rm]   (with \texttt{nmft}) first names are in regular font
% \item[fnm-def]  (with \texttt{nmft}) first names are in user defined
%                 font |\bibfnamefont{}|.
% \item[--]       first names are in same font as the surnames.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Citation font:} what is written by the |\cite| command
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is no special font
% \item[lab-it]   cited names in italics
% \item[lab-sc]   cited names in small caps
% \item[lab-bf]   cited names in bold face
% \item[lab-def]  cited names in user defined font |\bibnamefont{}|.
% \item[and-rm]   word `and' in cited names in normal font
% \item[xlab-it]  extra label (letter after year) in italics
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Block punctuation:} between logical sections (not mutually
% exclusive)
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is period after each logical section, including end
% \item[blk-com]  use commas, except at very end (changes \textsl{In} to
%                     \textsl{in})
% \item[blk-tit]  like \texttt{blk-com} except period follows titles of
%                      articles and books
% \item[blk-tita] like \texttt{blk-com} except period follows article title
% \item[tit-col] with \texttt{blk-tit} or \texttt{blk-tita}, for colon instead of period
% \item[com-semi] with \texttt{blk-com}, uses semi-colon instead of comma
% \item[com-blank] with \texttt{blk-com}, uses blanks instead of comma
% \item[in-col]   puts a colon after \textsl{In} or \textsl{in} for edited works
% \item[in-it]    puts word \textsl{in} in italics (may be used with
%                   \texttt{in-col})
% \item[in-x]     suppresses the word \textsl{in} for edited works
% \item[fin-bare] no punctuation at the very end
% \item[au-col] puts a colon after the author/editor block
% \item[blknt]  puts period before note
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Date:} if missing
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] Missing date replaced by ???? (author--year)
% \item[blkyear] Missing date left blank, even in label.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Date:} position and enclosure
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is date at end, before notes; for author--year,
%                   date consists only of year, no month
% \item[dt-jnl]   date at end as for default, except for journal articles
%                   where it follows the journal name as part of specification
% \item[dt-end]   date goes after any notes
% \item[dt-beg]   date goes after authors' names
% \item[yr-par]   date in parentheses ()
% \item[yr-brk]   date in brackets []
% \item[yr-com]   date preceded by comma and space
% \item[yr-col]   date preceded by colon and space
% \item[yr-per]   date preceded by period and space
% \item[yr-blk]   date preceded by space
% \item[dtrev]    date as year month instead of month year
% \item[dtbf]     date bold face
% \item[aymth]    include month even for author-year
% \item[xmth]     suppress month for numerical mode
% \item[yrp-x]    suppresses punctuation following month, year when date
%                 is just after authors
% \item[yrp-col]  adds colon and space after date when just after authors
% \item[yrp-semi] adds semi-colon and space after date when just after authors
% \item[yrp-per]  adds period and space after date
% \item[yrpp-xsp] removes blank following year punctuation
% \item[note-yr]  permits text (like ``in press'') in the \texttt{year} field
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Article in journal:} style of title, volume, pages
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is: Title. \textit{Journal}, vol(num):p1--p2
% \item[injnl]    adds word \textsl{in} before journal name, same style as
%                 for incollections
% \item[volp-sp]  as above, but with a space, vol(num):~p1--p2
% \item[volp-semi] semi-colon instead of colon:   vol(num);~p1--p2
% \item[volp-com] comma and space instead of colon:   vol(num),~p1--p2
% \item[volp-blk] only space instead of colon:   vol(num)~p1--p2
% \item[vol-bf]   volume in bold
% \item[vol-it]   volume in italics
% \item[vol-2bf]  volume and number bold
% \item[vnum-x]   no number for journals, only volume
% \item[vnum-sp]  space between, as vol (num)
% \item[vnum-cm]  replace vol(num) with vol, num
% \item[vnum-nr]  replace vol(num) with vol, no. num
% \item[vnum-h]   replace vol(num) with vol, \#num
% \item[vnum-b]   replace vol(num) with vol num
% \item[jdt-v]    year in parentheses attached to volume: vol(year) num
% \item[jdt-vs]   as above, with space: vol (year) num
% \item[jdt-p]    year precedes pages: vol(num), (year) p1--p2
% \item[jdt-pc]   as above, with comma: vol(num), (year), p1--p2
% \item[jpg-1]    only starting page given
% \item[pgsep-c]  page numbers over 10,000 have comma
% \item[pgsep-s]  page numbers over 10\,000 have space
% \item[pgsep-p]  page numbers over 10.000 have period
% \item[jwdpg]    include `page' or `pp' for articles
% \item[jwdvol]   include `volume' or `vol' for articles
% \item[jnm-x]    no punctuation after journal name
% \item[tit-it]   article title in italics
% \item[tit-qq]   article title in quotes
% \item[bt-rm]    booktitle in upright font, not italic (this will be issued
%                 with \texttt{btit-rm} normally; separate options allow for
%                 more control if wanted
% \item[bt-qq]    booktitle of incollection and inproceedings in quotes
% \item[qt-s]     (with \texttt{tit-qq}) single instead of double quotes
% \item[qt-g]     (with \texttt{tit-qq}) guillemets instead of quotes
% \item[qx]       (with \texttt{tit-qq}) comma outside quotes
% \item[jtit-x]   no article title (applies only to journals and
%                 collections)
% \item[atit-u]   article title capitalized as in entry, default is
%                 sentence capitalization (first word and words following
%                 colons)
% \item[jxper]    abbreviated journal names have periods removed, as
%                 `Phys Rev'
% \item[jttl-rm]  name of journal not in italics
% \item[pp-last]  pages appear at end, before any notes
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Number and series:} for collections and inproceedings
%
% This is a confusing issue. The standard wants to print something like
% ``number 123 in Collected Works'', and issues a warning if there is a number
% without a series. However, for many such works, there is an identification
% number for the collection, such as ESA~SP-123. Giving this as the number
% without a series results in ``number ESA~SP-123'' and a warning. Setting the
% series to this code number produces desired results, but is illogical.
%
% Another problem is that this code number should often should appear just
% before the publisher name,
% whereas the standard places it elsewhere.
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]  default, number must have series, \textsl{number} is printed
% \item[num-xser] default behaviour if both number and series present, but if
%      only number is there, it is printed without the word \textsl{number} and
%      without a warning
% \item[numser]  moves the number/series to just before the publisher/organization
% \item[ser-vol] for a book in a series with volume number, appears as ``\textit{Series-Name}, vol.~23''
%       rather than ``vol.~23 of \textit{Series-Name}''
% \item[ser-ed] for incollection, inproceedings, the series and volume appear between
%       the booktitle and the editors
% \end{opt}
%
%
% \textbf{Thesis title:} formatted like a book or article
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is like a book title
% \item[thtit-a]  titles of PhD and Master theses formatted like articles
% \item[thtit-x]  no thesis title
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Technical Report title:} formatted like book or article
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is like an article title
% \item[trtit-b]  titles of technical reports formatted like books
% \item[trnum-it] \textsl{technical report} and number italic
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Books:}  title font style, pages, and address location
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is italicized
% \item[btit-rm]  book title plain
% \item[bkpg-par] pages in books places in parentheses
% \item[bkpg-x]   pages in books bare without word \textsl{pages}
% \item[add-pub]  publisher's address before name, colon separated
% \item[pub-par]  publisher and address in parentheses
% \item[pub-date] publisher with address and date in parentheses
% \item[pub-xc]   with \texttt{pub-date}, suppresses comma before date
% \item[pub-xpar] with \texttt{pub-date} to suppress parentheses
% \item[pre-pub]  publisher placed before chapter and page information
% \item[pre-edn]  edition before publisher
% \item[pg-bk]    add number of pages for books and booklets
% \item[pg-pre]   with \texttt{pg-bk}, total pages comes before publisher
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Abbreviations:} of various words, default is no abbreviations
% \begin{opt}
% \item[pp]       abbreviate \textsl{page(s)} as \textsl{p.} and \textsl{pp.}
% \item[ppx]      no word \textsl{page(s)} or abbreviation
% \item[ed]       abbreviate \textsl{editor(s)} as \textsl{ed.} and
%                     \textsl{eds.}
% \item[ednx]     abbreviates \textsl{edition} as \textsl{ed.} instead
%                     of \textsl{edn.}
% \item[abr]      abbreviate \textsl{volume}, \textsl{edition},
%                     \textsl{technical report}, etc.
% \item[mth-bare] months abbreviated without dots
% \item[jabr]     abbreviate names of prestored journals
% \item[ord]      write edition numbers as 1st, 2nd, instead as words.
% \item[xedn]     suppress conversion of editions (for English) to avoid
%                 overflowing some \btx\ installations
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Editor:} alternative for \emph{in edited} book, inbook, or proceedings.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       ``in \emph{names}, editors, \emph{title}''
% \item[edpar]    ``in \emph{names} (editors), \emph{title}''
% \item[edparc]   ``in \emph{names}, (editors) \emph{title}''
% \item[edparxc]  ``in \emph{names} (editors) \emph{title}''
% \item[bkedcap]  capitalizes ``Editor''
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Editor:} alternative for \emph{in edited} incollection or inproceedings.
% If none of these are selected, they are treated the same as an edited book.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       ``in \emph{names}, editors, \emph{title}''
% \item[edby]     ``in \emph{title}, edited by \emph{names}''
% \item[edby-par] ``in \emph{title} (edited by \emph{names})''
% \item[edby-parc] ``in \emph{title}, (edited by \emph{names})''
% \item[edcap]    (with \texttt{edby-par}) capitalizes ``Edited by'' or
%                    ``Editor''
% \item[edbyx]    (with \texttt{edby} or \texttt{edby-par}) replaces text
%                 \textsl{edited by} by \textsl{editor(s)} before the names,
% \item[edbyw]    same as \texttt{edbyx} but with word \textsl{editor} only in
%                  parentheses
% \item[edbyy]    (with \texttt{edby} or \texttt{edby-par}) replaces text
%                 \textsl{edited by} by \textsl{editor(s)} after the names,
%                 as ``in \emph{title}, \emph{names}, editors''.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{ISBN, ISSN numbers:} include or not
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is no ISBN number, ignore this field,
% \item[isbn]     include an ISBN number as optional entry for books, booklets,
%                 incollections, inproceedings
% \item[issn]     include an ISSN number for periodicals
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{URL address:} include or not, and how
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       ignore URL field,
% \item[url]      process URL field,
% \item[url-blk]  (with \texttt{url}) URL text as regular blocked item,
% \item[url-nt]   URL text treated as a note
% \item[url-nl]   URL text added as new line below reference (Harvard style)
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{DOI number:} include or not
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is not to include the Digital Object Identifier
% \item[doi]      include the DOI number
% \item[agu-doi]  place DOI number AGU style, as part of page designation
%
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{REV\TeX\ data fields:} for use with \texttt{revtex.bst}.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]      Do not include extra fields for REV\TeX
% \item[revdata] Include fields \texttt{collaboration}, \texttt{eid},
%                  \texttt{numpages} for REV\TeX.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Eprint field:} used by REV\TeX\ but can be used on its own.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]      Do not include \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{archive} fields
% \item[eprint]  Include \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{archive} fields.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Reference component tagging:} apply structure to the |\bibitem| contents.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]      no tagging.
% \item[bibinfo] apply tags like |\bibinfo|, and |\eprint| to the fields of data
%                in the content of the |\bibitem| statement.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Emphasis:} defines what `italicized' really means
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]       default is |\em| (can switch between |\it|
%                 and |\rm|
% \item[em-it]    use |\it| instead (always italic)
% \item[em-x]     no emphasis
% \item[em-ul]    underline for emphasis (with or without \texttt{ulem})
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Special punctuation:}
% \begin{opt}
% \item[amper]    use \& in place of \textsl{and}
% \item[varand]   use command |\BIBand| in place of \textsl{and}
% \item[and-xcom] no comma before last \textsl{and} of an author list
%                   (citations and references)
% \item[and-com]  add comma before \textsl{and} even for two authors (in list of
%                  references)
% \item[and-com-ed] the same as \texttt{and-com} but for editors in
%                   collections
% \item[xand]    no \textsl{and} in an author list (references)
% \item[etal-it]  \textsl{et al.} in italics
% \item[etal-rm]  \textsl{et al.} in roman even if authors in different font
% \item[etal-xc]  no comma before \textit{et al.}
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Font commands:}
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]     use Plain \TeX\ (also \LaTeX~2.09) font commands
% \item[nfss]   use |\textbf|, |\textit|, |\emph| in place of |\bf|, |\it|,
%                and |\em|; only works then with \LaTeXe
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Plain \TeX\ compatibility:}
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--]    use \LaTeXe\ commands for testing, redefining commands
% \item[plntx] use \TeX\ for maximum compatibility
% \end{opt}
%
%
% \section{The Menu Information}\label{sec:menu}
% Here I describe the options and menu information for this particular
% master file \texttt{\filename}. To construct a \dtx{} driver file
% to generate a desired \texttt{.bst} file, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex}
% with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and give
% \begin{quote}\tt\filename\end{quote}
% when prompted for the name of the master file. Then answer the questions
% in the menus that follow. The menu information is extracted from here.
%
% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between
% \begin{quote}
%   |%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>| \dots\ |</!options&!driver&!bblbst>|
% \end{quote}
% in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
% extract the menu information, the documentation driver, or the
% \texttt{babelbst.tex} file.
%
% The main coding is divided into two sections, the \emph{head} and
% \emph{tail}; in between come any external language or journal name
% support files. The head part is marked with the \dtx{} guard option
% |<!tail>| and the tail with |<!head>|. This roundabout means of doing
% things makes it possible to process \texttt{\filename} with \texttt{.dbj}
% files that were generated for the older \texttt{genbst.mbs} file by
% simply changing the name of the source file as shown in
% Section~\ref{sec:update}. If both \texttt{head} and \texttt{tail} (and
% \texttt{exlang}) options are omitted, as they are in the older
% \texttt{.dbj} files, \texttt{\filename} is processed completely in one
% pass. To include external files, two passes are needed, one for each
% part, with the external file(s) coming in between.
%
% Note too that if the internal language commands are taken (i.e., if
% \texttt{exlang} option is not given) then the default language is
% English, which is tested for as |<!babel>|. This too permits the simple
% update of older \texttt{.dbj}, at least for English.
%
% \subsection*{Selecting Language}
% Explicit words in the bibliography style, such as \textsl{and},
%      \textsl{editor}, etc.,
% are represented by functions \texttt{bbl.and}, \texttt{bbl.editor}, and so on.
% By default these functions translate to the normal English text, but
% other languages are also possible.
%
% The definitions of these functions for other languages are contained in
% external files. At this point, we can make use of features in
% \texttt{makebst} (version~3.0 or later) to ask for the name of such a
% definition file, and store it in |\cfile|. If no external file is
% specified, then the internal definitions are taken, for which there are
% two possibilities: English or \LaTeX{} commands (Babel).
%
% The commands |\MBswitch|, |\mes|, |\MBaskfile|, |\wr|, |\pc|, |\spsp| are
% defined in \texttt{makebst.tex}.
%
% If |\MBswitch| does not exist, then the version of \texttt{makebst}
% cannot support external files.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*options>
\expandafter\ifx\csname beginoptiongroup\endcsname\relax
 \mes{^^J******************^^J%
        !!!!!! VERSION CLASH !!!!!!!!!^^J%
        This mbs file requires makebst version 4.0 or more^^J%
        You must update makebst to run it with this mbs file^^J%
        No docstrip batch file can be produced on this run^^J%
         ******************}
 \let\temp\endinput\else\let\temp\relax\fi\temp

\newif\ifnumerical
\newif\ifmytemp
\mes{<<< For more information about the meanings of^^J%
     <<< the various options, see the section on ^^J%
     <<< Menu Information in the .mbs file documentation.}

\umes{EXTERNAL FILES:}
\expandafter\ifx\csname MBswitch\endcsname\relax
 \mes{^^J**************^^J%
        Makebst version is less than 3.0^^J%
        Cannot add external file for language definition^^J%
        **************}
 \umes{No included files.}%
 \def\cfile{}\def\jfile{}%
\else
 \MBaskfile{^^JName of language definition file}(\mroot.\mext)i\cfile
 \edef\ctemp{\mroot.\mext}
 \ifx\ctemp\cfile\def\cfile{}\fi
 \umes{Name of language file: \string\cfile=\cfile.}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% A second type of external file that can be added is one containing names
% of journals that are to be prestored into the \texttt{.bst} file.
% Several file names are allowed here, with the root names separated by
% commas, and with the common extension added at the end. To assist later
% parsing of the names, an additional comma is added before the extension.
%
% Note that in this case |\MBaskfile| treats the file(s) as output, i.e.,
% it does not check if the file(s) actually exist.
%
% The macro |\Mgetnext| allows the root names to be extracted from the
% list of file names.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\jfile{}
 \ask{\yn}{^^JInclude file(s) for extra journal names? (NO)}
 \mytempfalse
 \if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else\mytemptrue\fi\fi\fi
 \ifmytemp
  \MBaskfile{^^JFile to include}(physjour,geojour,photjour.mbs)o\jfile
  \edef\jfile{\froot,.\fext}
  \umes{Name of included files: \string\jfile=\jfile.}%
 \else
  \umes{No included files.}%
 \fi
\fi%MBswitch
\def\Mgetnext#1,#2.#3??{\def\froot{#1}\def\Mrest{#2}\def\fext{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If no external files are specified, then both |\cfile| and |\jfile| are
% empty. In this case, do \emph{not} set the options \texttt{head} and
% \texttt{tail}, which control the \dtx{} passes through
% \texttt{filename}. Now only one pass is made.
%
% If there is an external definition file, or if an external list of
% journal names, then some extra text must be
% written to fit in with that already written by \texttt{makebst}. This is
% explained in that documentation. The |\MBswitch| command turns the curly
% braces |{..}| into normal characters, and the parentheses |(..)| take on
% their grouping functionality. This permits unbalances braces to be
% written to the output file.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if!\cfile\jfile!\else
 \begingroup\MBswitch
  \wr(\spsp head,\string\MBopta})
  \if!\cfile!\else
   \wr(\string\from{\cfile}{\string\MBopta})
  \fi
  \if!\jfile!\else
   \let\jxfile\jfile
   \loop
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Parse the list of journal name files, adding a new |\from| for each one.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\Mgetnext\jxfile??
    \wr(\string\from{\froot.\fext}{\string\MBopta})
    \edef\jxfile(\Mrest.\fext)
    \if!\Mrest!\def\Mtst(1)\else\def\Mtst()\fi
   \if!\Mtst!
   \repeat
  \fi
  \wr(\string\from{\mroot.\mext}{tail,\string\MBopta}})
  \wr(\string\def\string\MBopta{\pc)
 \endgroup
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Ask whether
% explicit English words wanted or \LaTeX{} commands whose definitions are
% to be found in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT
 (if no external language file)}%
 {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{English}{words used explicitly}
\optdef{b}{babel}{Babel}
    {(words replaced by commands defined in babelbst.tex)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\if!\cfile!\relax\else
\wr{\spsp\spsp exlang,\pc: External language file}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Author--year or numerical}
% The first question is whether a numerical or author--year citation style
% is to be used. If the latter, the supporting system is my {\tt
% natbib.sty}, which expects |\bibitem| to have an optional argument
% containing the short form of the authors, plus year in parentheses.
% E.g.,
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% There is now a newer version of \texttt{natbib.sty} (v5.3) that
% supports an optional full author list too, as
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)Daly, Keppler, and Williams]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% Other systems are also supported, such as the Harvard family of
% bibliography styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}), which have entries in the
% form
% \begin{quote}
% |\harvarditem[Daly et al.]{Daly, Keppler,|\\
% |       and Williams}{1990}{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% or the astronomy family (with \texttt{astron.sty}) with entries like
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% or the Chicago family (with \texttt{chicago.sty}) with entries like
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[\protect\citeautheryear{Daly, Keppler, and|\\
% |      Williams}{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% or the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}) with entries like
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% or the so-called ``author--date'' group (with \texttt{authordate1-4.sty})
% with entries of the form
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[\protect\citename{Daly et al.}1990]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% Finally, there is the \texttt{apalike} format of Oren Patashnik, for use
% with \texttt{apalike.sty} that has entries of the form
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[Daly et al., 1990]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
%
% In addition to numerical or author--year citation styles, there is also a
% \texttt{cite} style available in which the label is the same as the cite
% key. This is for listing entire contents of databases with the cite key
% visible.
%
% A flag |\ifnumerical| is established because some of the following menu
% features depend on which system is to be used.
%
% The \texttt{alph} option produces labels as in \texttt{alpha.bst}; options
% \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f} modify these. Standard is: first three
% letters of the single author (Dal90 for Daly, 1990) and first letters of
% first three authors (DK90 for Daly and Kopka, 1990). Alternatives are first
% three letters of the first author, no matter how many authors there are, and
% full name of first author.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{STYLE OF CITATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Numerical}{as in standard LaTeX}
\optdef{a}{ay}{Author-year}{with some non-standard interface}
\optdef{b}{alph}{Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90}{for single or multiple authors}
\optdef{o}{alph,alf-1}{Alpha style, Jon90}{even for multiple authors}
\optdef{f}{alph,alf-f}{Alpha style, Jones90}{(full name of first author)}
\optdef{c}{cite}{Cite key}{(special for listing contents of bib file)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\if\ans a\numericalfalse\else\numericaltrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytempfalse   \else\mytemptrue   \fi
\beginoptiongroup{HTML OUTPUT
 (if non author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical*\fi}
\optdef{*}{}{Normal LaTeX}{output}
\optdef{h}{html}{Hypertext}{output, in HTML code, in paragraphs}
\optdef{n}{html,htlist}{Hypertext list}{with sequence numbers}
\optdef{k}{html,htdes}{Hypertext with keys}{for viewing databases}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM
 (if author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}
\optdef{*}{nat}{Natbib}{for use with natbib v5.3 or later}
\optdef{o}{}{Older Natbib}{without full authors citations}
\optdef{l}{alk}{Apalike}{for use with apalike.sty}
\optdef{h}{har}{Harvard}{system with harvard.sty}
\optdef{a}{ast}{Astronomy}{system with astron.sty}
\optdef{c}{cay}{Chicago}{system with chicago.sty}
\optdef{n}{nmd}{Named}{system with named.sty}
\optdef{d}{cn}{Author-date}{system with authordate1-4.sty}
\getans
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \texttt{harvard} family has been extended for \LaTeXe, and the new
% \texttt{.bst} files allow the word \textsl{and} and the brackets around years
% to be variable with commands. These features may be added too.
% The URL field used to be exclusively part of Harvard, but now exists
% independently of it too.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED
 (if Harvard support selected)}
 {\if\ans h*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{harnm}{With Harvard extensions}{for LaTeX2e version of harvard.sty}
\optdef{n}{}{Older Harvard}{style, for LaTeX 2.09}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Language switching}
% A \texttt{language} field can be present to specify the original language of
% the reference; with \verb!\setlanguge!, the hyphenation patterns are set for
% setting the title in that language.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{LANGUAGE FIELD}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No language field}{}
\optdef{l}{lang}{Add language field}{to switch hyphenation patterns temporarily}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Annotations}
% Annotations to a reference are additional information not normally printed
% out in the list of references. They are used for listing databases.
% The coding here was offered by Soren Dayton.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ANNOTATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No annotations}{will be recognized}
\optdef{a}{annote}{Annotations}{in annote field or in .tex file of citekey name}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Presentations}
% Presentations are talks at meetings, oral or poster, that are not otherwise
% published. The author making the presentation is indicated with the \texttt{key}
% entry, which is the speaker's number within the author list. The font used
% to highlight the speaker is either bold or italics, depending on the secondary
% option, otherwise not highlighted.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{PRESENTATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Do not add presentation type}{for conference talks}
\optdef{p}{pres}{Add presentation, speaker not highlighted}{}
\optdef{b}{pres,pres-bf}{Presentation, speaker bold face}{}
\optdef{i}{pres,pres-it}{Presentaion, speaker italic}{}
\optdef{c}{pres,pres-sc}{Presentaion, speaker in small caps}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Ordering of the listed references}
%   Choices here depend on citation style. The default in both cases is
% alphabetical order of all authors. For numerical style, one may also
% choose an unsorted order, which means the order is the same as the original
% citations. This corresponds to \texttt{unsrt.bst}. Order of citation is
% also offered for author--year for \texttt{natbib}-type styles that can
% also be used for numerical listings.
%
% Another possibility is to order first by year, then authors. This too only
% makes sense for numerical citations. However, it is offered for author--year
% in the event that a \texttt{natbib}-type style is used for numerical
% listings.
%
% For the alpha style, the ordering is by label only, so no option is
% offered here (|\ifnumerical| is \meta{true} and |\ifmytemp| is \meta{false}).
%
% For author--year, the second choice is by label. (The label is the
% optional |\bibitem| argument, and is what is printed in place of the
% |\cite| command.) With this option, all the papers with the same first
% author are ordered so that the one-author papers come first, followed by
% the two-author papers, followed by the multiple-author papers. This is a
% more sensible system for author--year citations, and is demanded by some
% journals (like JGR).
%
% One problem that can arise here is when two or more references have the
% same set of authors and year; normally they are then ordered by the
% title, ignoring initial words like \textsl{the} and \textsl{a}, with the
% letters a, b,
% c, \dots, added to the year. This can mean that a set of references with
% a natural sequence will be put into a different order. An alternative is
% to order them by the citation keyword instead of by title. This of course
% assumes that the keywords in this case reflect that natural sequence.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\ans\relax
\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES
 (if non-author/year and non-alph)}
 {\ifnumerical\ifmytemp*\fi\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors}
\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, like unsrt.bst)}
\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors}
\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%
\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES
 (if author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors}
\optdef{l}{seq-lab}{By label}%
   {(Jones before Jones and James before Jones et al)}
\optdef{k}{seq-key}{By label and cite key}{instead of label and title, as above}
\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors (for publication lists)}
\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors (most recent first)}
\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% The standard \btx\ styles consider the \emph{von} part of the name to be a
% fixed part of the surname. European usage tends to alphabetize ignoring these
% honorifics.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ORDER ON VON PART
 (if not citation order)}
 {\if\ans c\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Sort on von part}{(de la Maire before Defoe)}
\optdef{x}{vonx}{Sort without von part}{(de la Maire after Mahone)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Formatting author names}
% The default is that the full names of the authors are listed, given names
% first, unabbreviated. Of course, if only the initials have been given in
% the \texttt{.bib} file, then that is all that can appear in the list. Other
% possibilities are to use initials (even if full names in the \texttt{.bib}
% file) either before or after the surnames. A specialty of the journals of
% the American Geophysical Union is to have only the first name with
% reversed initials.
%
% If the reference is part of a larger work with editors, then the editor
% names appear later in the reference text, usually as ``edited by \dots''
% or as ``\emph{names} (editors)''. In these cases, the editor names are
% not usually reversed (surname first) even if the authors' names are.
% An option is provided to format such editor names exactly as the authors'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{ed-au}{Full, surname last}{(John Frederick Smith)}
\optdef{f}{nm-revf}{Full, surname first}{(Smith, John Frederick)}
\optdef{i}{nm-init,ed-au}{Initials + surname}{(J. F. Smith)}
\optdef{r}{nm-rev}{Surname + initials}{(Smith, J. F.)}
\optdef{s}{nm-rv}{Surname + dotless initials}{(Smith J F)}
\optdef{w}{nm-rvvc}{Surname + comma + spaceless initials}{(Smith, J.F.)}
\optdef{x}{nm-rvx}{Surname + pure initials}{(Smith JF)}
\optdef{y}{nm-rvcx}{Surname + comma + pure initials}{(Smith, JF)}
\optdef{z}{nm-rvv}{Surname + spaceless initials}{(Smith J.F.)}
\optdef{a}{nm-rev1}{Only first name reversed, initials}%
   {(AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)}
\optdef{b}{nm-revv1}{First name reversed, with full names}%
   {(Smith, John Fred, Harry Kab Jones)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans r\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS
 (if author names reversed)}
 {\ifmytemp*\fi}
\if\ans r
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith}
\fi
\if\ans s
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J J Smith}
\fi
\if\ans a
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith}
\fi
\if\ans x
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by JJ Smith}
\fi
\if\ans f
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith}
\fi
\if\ans y
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J.J. Smith}
\fi
\if\ans b
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith}
\fi
\optdef{r}{ed-rev}{Editor names reversed}{just like authors'}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF JUNIOR
  (if author names reversed)}
  {}
\optdef{*}{jnrlst}{Junior comes last}{as Smith, John, Jr.}
\optdef{m}{}{Junior between}{as Smith, Jr., John}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION
 (if author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{No `junior' part in the citations}{but in the ref listing}
\optdef{j}{jnrlab}{`Junior' in citations}{as well as in ref listing}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Author names separated by commas}{}
\optdef{s}{aunm-semi}{Names separated by semi-colon}{}
\optdef{h}{aunm-sl}{Names separated by slash}{/}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Author/editor names always present}{}
\optdef{d}{nmdash}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash}{}
\optdef{2}{nmdash,nmd-2}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes}{}
\optdef{3}{nmdash,nmd-3}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Number of authors}
% Normally the complete list of authors as given in the \texttt{.bib} file is
% presented in the reference list. However, some journals prefer to limit
% them to a maximum. If there are more than this maximum number of author
% names, then a minimum number plus \textsl{et al.} are listed.
%
% Because no test for consistency of the numbers is carried out in the
% \texttt{.bst} file itself (it might be possible, but I found it too complex),
% this is done here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER OF AUTHORS IN BIBLIOGRAPHY:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{All authors}{included in listing}
\optdef{l}{nmlm}{Limited authors}{(et al replaces missing names)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\if\ans l
\loop
  \ask{\num}{Maximum number of authors (1-99)}
  \ifnum\num>99\relax
  \mes{*** Must be between 1 and 99}
\repeat
\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp x#1,\pc: Maximum of #1\space authors}
  \else\wr{\spsp\spsp x#10,x#2,\pc: Maximum of #1#2\space authors}\fi}
\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax
\mes{\spsp You have selected maximum \num\space authors}
\edef\numx{\num}
\loop
  \ask{\num}{Minimum number (before et al given) (1-\numx)}
  \ifnum\num>\numx
  \mes{*** Must be between 1 and \numx}
\repeat
\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp m#1,\pc: Minimum of #1\space authors}
  \else\wr{\spsp\spsp m#10,m#2,\pc: Minimum of #1#2\space authors}\fi}
\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax
\mes{\spsp You have selected minimum \num\space authors}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Something that I finally add after being asked many times, is to allow for
% more than one name in the citation before inserting \textsl{et~al.}
% to allow more than 2 authors before truncating
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{AUTHORS IN CITATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{One author et al}{for three or more authors}
\optdef{m}{mcite}{Some other truncation scheme}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans m\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS BEFORE ET AL:
 (if regular cite not selected)}
 {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{mct-1}{One et al}{}
\optdef{2}{mct-2}{One, Two et al}{}
\optdef{3}{mct-3}{One, Two, Three et al}{}
\optdef{4}{mct-4}{One, Two, Three, Four et al}{}
\optdef{5}{mct-5}{One, Two, Three, Four, Five et al}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS WITHOUT ET AL:
 (if regular cite not selected)}
 {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{mct-x2}{Two authors without truncating}{}
\optdef{3}{mct-x3}{Three authors}{without truncating}
\optdef{4}{mct-x4}{Four authors}{without truncating}
\optdef{5}{mct-x5}{Five authors}{without truncating}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Typeface of names}
% The author names in the list of references normally appear in the current
% typeface. This may be changed to small caps, bold, or italics.
%
% Alternatively, the surnames only can be formatted, with the first names in the
% regular font. One can also specify that the words `and' and `et~al.'\ should be
% in the regular font, or that `et~al.'\ be italic.
%
% Another possibility is that the names be put into a command |\bibnamefont{..}|,
% which must be defined in the \LaTeX\ document. By default, this command does
% not format its argument. There is also a |\bibfnamefont| command for the first
% names, to be user-defined.
%
% Editor names in a collection or in a book will not normally have these
% fonts applied to them; this may be additionally selected.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Normal font for author names}{}
\optdef{s}{nmft,nmft-sc}{Small caps authors}{(\string\sc)}
\optdef{i}{nmft,nmft-it}{Italic authors}{(\string\it\space or \string\em)}
\optdef{b}{nmft,nmft-bf}{Bold authors}{(\string\bf)}
\optdef{u}{nmft,nmft-def}{User defined author font}{(\string\bibnamefont)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES
 (if non-default font for authors)}
 {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{First names same font as surnames}{}
\optdef{r}{fnm-rm}{First names in normal font}{}
\optdef{u}{fnm-def}{First names in user defined font}{(\string\bibfnamefont)}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Editors incollection normal font}{}
\optdef{a}{nmfted}{Editors incollection like authors}{font}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{`And' in author font}{(JONES AND JAMES)}
\optdef{r}{nmand-rm}{`And' in normal font}{(JONES and JAMES)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Names in Citation label}
% This applies to author--year style only. The label is the text written
% by the |\cite| command, and for author--year style, this is something like
% `Daly et al.\ (1990b)'. One may select italics for the authors and for the
% extra label attached to the year. The year always remains plain.
%
% This parallels the font selection for the names in the list of references
% except that there no choice for the first names, since only surnames
% are used in the labels. A user-defined |\citefontname| may also
% be selected, but this \emph{must} be defined by the user since there
% will be no default definition for it.
%
% If a font is selected for the cited authors, then the word `and' may be
% optionally put in the normal font.
%
% It is not possible to select the type of brackets for the year, since
% this is determined by the \LaTeX{} style option that manages the
% author--year citations. This is not standard \LaTeX, so that there are a
% number of private style files for achieving this.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT
 (if author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Cited authors plain}{as result of \string\cite\space command}
\optdef{i}{lab,lab-it}{Cited authors italic}{}
\optdef{s}{lab,lab-sc}{Cited authors small caps}{}
\optdef{b}{lab,lab-bf}{Cited authors bold}{}
\optdef{u}{lab,lab-def}{User defined citation font}{(\string\citenamefont)}
\getans

\mytempfalse
\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS
 (if non-default font for citation lables)}
 {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Cited `and' in author font}{}
\optdef{r}{and-rm}{Cited `and' in normal font}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF EXTRA LABEL
 (The extra letter on the year)}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Extra label plain}{}
\optdef{i}{xlab-it}{Extra label italic}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Label for missing author names}
%
% If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files
% use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the
% entries.
%
% For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the
% reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can
% suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7)
% to print only that key text as a code designation for the work. Thus if
% \texttt{KEY = "CS1-345"} and there are no authors, then |\citep| produces
% (CS1-345) and |\citet| simply CS1-345. That is, they behave like
% |\citeauthor|. If \texttt{natbib} did not recognize the blank year, one would
% get (CS1-345, ) and CS1-345 (). (Earlier versions of \texttt{natbib} crash on
% a blank year.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING
 (if author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{keyxyr}{Year blank when KEY replaces missing author}{(for natbib 7.0)}
\optdef{y}{}{Year included when KEY replaces missing author}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Missing date}
% A missing date can be set to ???? or simply left blank. In the latter case,
% \texttt{natbib} version~7 will print only the authors without any year
% punctuation or brackets.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{MISSING DATE
 (if author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Missing date set to ????}{in label and text}
\optdef{b}{blkyear}{Missing date left blank}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Position of date}
% This applies to author--year style only. It makes sense to put the date
% immediately after the author list, since the two items (author and year)
% are the identifiers of the reference. Default position is at the
% end of the references, before any notes. It is also possible to place
% it even after the notes.
%
% Medical journals have a system where the date is part of the journal
% specification, as Lancet 1994;45(2):34--40. Otherwise the date appears at
% the end.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{DATE POSITION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Date at end}{}
\optdef{b}{dt-beg}{Date after authors}{}
\optdef{j}{dt-jnl}{Date part of journal spec.}{(as 1994;45:34-40) else at end}
\optdef{e}{dt-end}{Date at very end}{after any notes}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\else\if\ans j\mytemptrue\else\mytempfalse\fi\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Format of date}
% The year may be enclosed in parentheses, brackets, or preceded by a
% colon. If none of these are selected, the date (month plus year) appears.
% For author--year, the date normally consists only of the year, no month,
% but this may be overridden.
%
% If the date comes just after the authors, then one might want special
% punctuation following it, like a colon, or space only. The latter is
% probably desirable if the date is brackets or parentheses.
%
% The date can even be put into bold face.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT
 (if non author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Plain month and year}{without any brackets}
\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Date in parentheses}{as (May 1993)}
\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Date in brackets}{as [May 1993]}
\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Date preceded by colon}{as `: May 1993'}
\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Date preceded by period}{as `. May 1993'}
\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, May 1993'}
\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Date preceded by space}{only, as ` May 1993'}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{SUPPRESS MONTH:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Date is month and year}{}
\optdef{x}{xmth}{Date is year only}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE
 (if including month)}
 {\if\ans x\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{}
\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT
 (if author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Year plain}{without any brackets}
\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Year in parentheses}{as (1993)}
\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Year in brackets}{as [1993]}
\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Year preceded by colon}{as `: 1993'}
\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Year preceded by period}{as `. 1993'}
\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, 1993'}
\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Year preceded by space}{only, as ` 1993'}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{INCLUDE MONTHS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Date is year only}{without the month}
\optdef{m}{aymth}{Include month in date}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE
 (if including month)}
 {\if\ans m*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{}
\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{DATE PUNCTUATION
 (if date not at end)}
 {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Date with standard block punctuation}{(comma or period)}
\optdef{c}{yrp-col}{Colon after date}{as 1994:}
\optdef{s}{yrp-semi}{Semi-colon after date}{as 1994;}
\optdef{p}{yrp-per}{Period after date}{even when blocks use commas}
\optdef{x}{yrp-x}{No punct. after date}{}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{BLANK AFTER DATE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Space after date}{and punctuation}
\optdef{x}{yrpp-xsp}{No space after date}{as 1994:45}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{DATE FONT:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Date in normal font}{}
\optdef{b}{dtbf}{Date in bold face}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Normally in author--year citations, the \texttt{year} entry is truncated
% to the last 4 characters, which should be the 4 digits of the year. Some
% users have requested the possibility of suppressing this truncation so
% that they may put text in the \texttt{year} field, such as ``in press.''
% Another use for it is when years are given as ``1968--72''. Actually,
% I have no idea why the year should be truncated at all.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{TRUNCATE YEAR
 (if author-year citations)}
 {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{note-yr}{Year text full}{as 1990--1993 or `in press'}
\optdef{t}{}{Year truncated}{to last 4 digits}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Article title in journal}
% The title of an article in a journal or in a collection (a book, or
% conference proceedings) may appear plain, in italics, within single
% or double quotes or even in guillemets. The last is best with T1 coding; a
% poor man's version for OT1 is provided; \LaTeXe\ is required in both cases.
%
% Furthermore, it may have sentence capitalization (first
% word and word following colon) or be capitalized as in the \texttt{.bib} file
% entry. That is why it is recommended to capitalize the entry text as it
% should appear when fully capitalized, putting words that are always
% capitalized in braces. Example:
% \begin{quote}
% |TITLE="The Results of the {Giotto} Mission"|
% \end{quote}
% which produces either ``The results of the Giotto mission'' or ``The
% Results of the Giotto Mission'', depending on option.
%
% Additionally, the article titles may be fully suppressed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{TITLE OF ARTICLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Title plain}{with no special font}
\optdef{i}{tit-it}{Title italic}{(\string\em)}
\optdef{q}{tit-qq,qt-s}{Title and punctuation in single quotes}{(`Title,' ..)}
\optdef{d}{tit-qq}{Title and punctuation in double quotes}{(``Title,'' ..)}
\optdef{g}{tit-qq,qt-g}{Title and punctuation in guillemets}{(<<Title,>> ..)}
\optdef{x}{tit-qq,qt-s,qx}{Title in single quotes}{(`Title', ..)}
\optdef{y}{tit-qq,qx}{Title in double quotes}{(``Title'', ..)}
\optdef{z}{tit-qq,qt-g,qx}{Title in guillemets}{(<<Title>>, ..)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans q\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans d\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans g\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans z\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES
 (if quoted title)}
 {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{bt-qq}{Quote collection and proceedings titles}{too}
\optdef{x}{}{Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Sentence style}{(capitalize first word and those in braces)}
\optdef{t}{atit-u}{Title style}{(just as in bib entry)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Article title present}{in journals and proceedings}
\optdef{x}{jtit-x}{No article title}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Journal names}
% Abbreviated journal names normally contain periods; the periods may be
% removed with this option. In fact, only letters, numbers, and spacing are
% retained.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Periods in journal names}{are retained, as `Phys. Rev.'}
\optdef{x}{jxper}{Dotless journal names}{as `Phys Rev'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Journal name is normally printed in italics; can be left in normal font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME FONT:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Journal name italics}{}
\optdef{r}{jttl-rm}{Journal name normal}{font}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Title of Theses and Technical Reports}
% The title of a these (PhD or Master's) is normally treated the same
% as that of a book. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of
% an article.
%
% The title of a technical report is normally treated the same as that
% of an article. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of a book.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{THESIS TITLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Thesis titles like books}{}
\optdef{a}{thtit-a}{Thesis title like article}{}
\optdef{x}{thtit-x}{No thesis title}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report title like articles}{}
\optdef{b}{trtit-b}{Tech. report title like books}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report and number plain}{as `Tech. Rep. 123'}
\optdef{i}{trnum-it}{Tech. report and number italic}%
      {as `{\string\it\space Tech. Rep. 123'}}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Journal reference}
% Great diversity of opinion exists as to how a journal reference is to be
% formatted. It consists of a volume, possibly a number, and page limits.
% The number is really only necessary if the page numbers within one volume
% start at 1 for each physical `number'. Since journals are often bound
% together in one volume later, it makes more sense to number the pages
% continuously through the whole volume.
%
% I am only aware of one journal that used to reset the pagination for each
% `number', in which case the number was part of the page designation.
% I had erroneously provided an option \texttt{vnum-pg} to achieve this, but I
% now realize that instead, for this one journal, the database entries must
% contain \texttt{pages="(2)33--2(55)"}. This option has been removed at
% version 3.84.
%
% A number of styles for journal specifications are
% \begin{quote}
%   \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
% 21(2):33--55             & 21, no.\ 2: 33--55\\
% \textbf{21}(2):33--55    & \textbf{21}, \#2, 33--55\\
% \textit{21}(2), 33--55   & \textit{21} (2); 33--55 \\
% 21(2) (1995) 33--55      & 21(1995), 33-55\\
% 21(2) 33--55             & vol.~21 (2), pp.~33--55
%   \end{tabular}
% \end{quote}
%
% Here both start and stop page numbers have been given; often only the
% start page is wanted.
%
% It is also possible to include the year as part of the journal specification,
% in which case the year is always in parentheses, attached snugly or with space
% to the volume, or preceding the pages.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOLUME:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Volume plain}{as vol(num)}
\optdef{i}{vol-it}{Volume italic}{as {\string\em\space vol}(num)}
\optdef{b}{vol-bf}{Volume bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol}(num)}
\optdef{d}{vol-2bf}{Volume and number bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol(num)}}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The form of the `number' is also given: in parentheses, with `no.',
% with \#, or omitted. The \texttt{vnum-b} option is meant to be used
% with \texttt{jdt-v} and \texttt{jdt-vs} but could be used alone.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Journal vol(num)}{as 34(2)}
\optdef{s}{vnum-sp}{Journal vol (num)}{as 34 (2)}
\optdef{c}{vnum-cm}{Journal vol, num}{as 34, 2}
\optdef{n}{vnum-nr}{Journal vol, no. num}{as 34, no. 2}
\optdef{h}{vnum-h}{Journal vol, \string\# number}{as 34, \string\#2}
\optdef{b}{vnum-b}{Journal vol number}{as 34 2}
\optdef{x}{vnum-x}{Journal vol, without number}{as 34}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME PUNCTUATION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Volume with colon}{as vol(num):ppp}
\optdef{s}{volp-sp}{Volume with colon and space}{as vol(num): ppp}
\optdef{h}{volp-semi}{Volume with semi-colon}{as vol(num); ppp}
\optdef{c}{volp-com}{Volume with comma}{as vol(num), ppp}
\optdef{b}{volp-blk}{Volume with blank}{as vol(num) ppp}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Journal year like others}{as given by date position}
\optdef{v}{jdt-v}{Journal vol(year)}{as 34(1995)}
\optdef{s}{jdt-vs}{Journal vol (year)}{as 34 (1995)}
\optdef{p}{jdt-p}{Year with pages}{as 34(2), (1995) 1345--1387}
\optdef{c}{jdt-pc}{Year, comma, pages}{as 34(2), (1995), 1345--1387}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{PAGE NUMBERS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Start and stop page numbers}{given}
\optdef{f}{jpg-1}{Only start page number}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{LARGE PAGE NUMBERS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No separators for large page numbers}{}
\optdef{c}{pgsep-c}{Comma inserted over 9999}{as 11,234}
\optdef{s}{pgsep-s}{Thin space inserted over 9999}{as 11 234}
\optdef{p}{pgsep-p}{Period inserted over 9999}{as 11.234}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Article pages numbers only}{as 234-256}
\optdef{p}{jwdpg}{Include `page' in articles}{as pp. 234--256}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Some journals want page numbers at the end, even for books, proceedings, as
% well as for journals.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF PAGES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Pages given mid text}{as is normal}
\optdef{e}{pp-last}{Pages at end}{but before any notes}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Article volume as number only}{as 21}
\optdef{p}{jwdvol}{Include `volume' in articles}{as vol. 21}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Fiddle with the format and location of the number/series for collections and
% inproceedings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{num-xser}{Allows number without series}{and suppresses word "number"}
\optdef{s}{}{Standard BibTeX}{as: "number 123 in Total Works"; error if number and no series}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{After chapter and pages}{as in standard BibTeX}
\optdef{t}{numser}{Just before publisher}{or organization}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Fiddle with the format and location of series and volume with books and collections.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Vol. 23 of Series}{as in standard BibTeX}
\optdef{s}{ser-vol}{Series, vol. 23}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Series and volume after the editors}{}
\optdef{e}{ser-ed}{Series and volume after booktitle}{and before editors}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% It is possible to decide whether the journal name should be
% separated from the following specifications with a blank or comma.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Comma after journal}{name}
\optdef{x}{jnm-x}{Space after journal}{name}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Books}
% The title of a book (as opposed to an article in a book or journal) is
% normally italicized. This may be set to the regular font.
%
% The page numbers in books may be set in parentheses, as (pp.\ 345--350).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{BOOK TITLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Book title italic}{(\string\em)}
\optdef{p}{btit-rm,bt-rm}{Book title plain}{(no font command)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{PAGES IN BOOKS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Pages in book plain}{as pp. 50-55}
\optdef{p}{bkpg-par}{Pages in book in parentheses}{as (pp. 50-55)}
\optdef{x}{bkpg-x}{Pages in book bare}{as 50-55}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Total book pages not printed}{}
\optdef{p}{pg-bk}{For book: 345 pages}{or pp.}
\optdef{a}{pg-bk,pg-pre}{Total book pages before publisher}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Some psychology journals wish to have the publisher's address preceding
% the name, separated by colon, as
% \begin{quote}New York: Wiley and Sons\end{quote}
%
% Some journals (e.g.\ Nature) put publisher in parentheses with date,
% as (Wiley and Sons, New York, 1983). These normally put the date in
% parentheses at the end anyway, so this is a merging of the two sets of
% parentheses.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER ADDRESS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Publisher, address}{as Harcourt, New York}
\optdef{a}{add-pub}{Address: Publisher}{as New York: Harcourt}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Publisher as normal block}{without parentheses}
\optdef{p}{pub-par}{Publisher in parentheses}{}
\optdef{d}{pub-date}{Publisher and date in parentheses}{(Oxford, 1994)}
\optdef{c}{pub-date,pub-xc}{Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma}{(Oxford 1994)}
\optdef{f}{pub-date,pub-xpar}{Publisher and date without parentheses}{Oxford, 1994}
\optdef{k}{pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc}{Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma}{Oxford 1994}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER POSITION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Publisher after chapter, pages}{}
\optdef{p}{pre-pub}{Publisher before chapter, pages}{}
\optdef{e}{pre-edn}{Publisher after edition}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{ISBN, ISSN, DOI numbers}
% Books normally possess an ISBN number. This may be included as an
% optional entry for \texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{booklet},
% \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{proceedings}, \texttt{inproceedings}.
% However, it should be suppressed for \texttt{inbook} etc.\ when
% there is a crossref to another book with the ISBN number.
%
% Periodicals contain an ISSN number. Add this to \texttt{article}, or
% course, but also to \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings}, since
% they are sometimes printed in a periodical.
%
% Journal articles that appear online are given a DOI number, something more
% robust than a URL that can change as machines are upgraded.
% The American Geophysical Union (AGU) uses the DOI as part of the
% page number substitution for electronic journals, placing the number
% where the pages would normally appear.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ISBN NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{isbn}{Include ISBN}{for books, booklets, etc.}
\optdef{x}{}{No ISBN}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{ISSN NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{issn}{Include ISSN}{for periodicals}
\optdef{x}{}{No ISSN}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{DOI NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{doi}{Include DOI}{as "doi: number"}
\optdef{a}{agu-doi,doi}{Insert DOI AGU style}{as part of page number}
\optdef{x}{}{No DOI}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Editor of book without author}
%
% This is normally
% \begin{quote}
%  J. K. James, editor
% \end{quote}
% but may also be
% \begin{quote}
%  J. K. James, (editor)\\
%  J. K. James (editor),
% \end{quote}
% Alternatively, the word \textsl{editor} may be capitalized and/or
% abbreviated.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS):}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Word `editor' after name}{}
\optdef{a}{edpar}{`Name (editor),'}{in parentheses, after name, comma after}
\optdef{b}{edpar,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor),'}{as above, editor upper case}
\optdef{c}{edparc}{`Name, (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, comma between}
\optdef{d}{edparc,bkedcap}{`Name, (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case}
\optdef{e}{edparxc}{`Name (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, no commas}
\optdef{f}{edparxc,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Edited by}
% For an article within an edited collection, the normal form is
% \begin{quote}
% In J. K. James, editor, \emph{Title of Collection} \dots
% \end{quote}
% Alternative forms are
% \begin{quote}
% In J. K. James (editor), \emph{Title} \dots\\
% In \emph{Title}, edited by J. K. James \dots\\
% In \emph{Title} (Edited by J. K. James) \dots
% \end{quote}
% If none of the \texttt{edby} variations is used, then the same system is
% used as for edited books, i.e. \texttt{edpar} applies.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Same as for edited book}{(names before booktitle)}
\optdef{b}{edby}{In booktitle, edited by .. }{(where .. is names)}
\optdef{p}{edby-par}{In booktitle (edited by ..)}{}
\optdef{c}{edby-parc}{In booktitle, (edited by ..)}{}
\optdef{e}{edby,edbyx}{In booktitle, editor ..}{}
\optdef{f}{edby,edbyw}{In booktitle, (editor) ..}{}
\optdef{k}{edby-par,edbyx}{In booktitle (editor..)}{}
\optdef{g}{edby-parc,edbyx}{In booktitle, (editor..)}{}
\optdef{j}{edby,edbyy}{In booktitle, .., editor}{}
\optdef{m}{edby-par,edbyy}{In booktitle (.., editor)}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans p\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans k\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY'
 (if editor capitalizable)}
 {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{`(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)'}{in lower case}
\optdef{c}{edcap}{`(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)'}{in upper case}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Block punctuation}
% Blocks are logical sections of the reference specification, such as the
% author block, the journal block, editor block, etc. These are normally
% separated by periods, but alternatively a comma may be used. Another
% choice is to use commas except after titles where a period is given.
%
% \LaTeX\ offers an \texttt{openbib} option, which means that the blocks
% are not only new sentences, but new lines as well. This can only
% function when the default option here is taken, for then the command
% |\newblock| is placed between the blocks. This command is normally
% defined to do nothing, but \LaTeX\ redefines it to issue a new line
% when open bibliographies are wanted.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS):}{}
\optdef{*}{}{\string\newblock\space after blocks}
   {(periods or new lines with openbib option)}
\optdef{c}{blk-com}{Comma between blocks}{}
\optdef{s}{blk-com,com-semi}{Semi-colon between blocks}{}
\optdef{b}{blk-com,com-blank}{Blanks between blocks}{}
\optdef{t}{blk-tit}{Period after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas}
\optdef{u}{blk-tit,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas}
\optdef{a}{blk-tita}{Period after titles of articles}{else commas}
\optdef{d}{blk-tita,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles}{else commas}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans t\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES
 (if not using \string\newblock)}
 {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Notes have regular punctuation}{like all other blocks}
\optdef{p}{blknt}{Notes preceded by period}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Author block normal}{with regular block punctuation}
\optdef{c}{au-col}{Author block with colon}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{\textsl{In} with colon}
% When referring to works in a collection, one begins the block describing
% that collection with \textsl{In}. Optionally, one may add a colon.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Space after `in'}{for incollection or inproceedings}
\optdef{c}{in-col}{Colon after `in'}{(as `In: ...')}
\optdef{i}{in-it}{Italic `in'}{and space}
\optdef{d}{in-col,in-it}{Italic `in' and colon}{}
\optdef{x}{in-x}{No word `in'}{for edited works}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES
 (if using 'in' with collections)}
 {\if\ans x\else*\fi}
\optdef{*}{}{No `in' before journal name}{}
\optdef{i}{injnl}{Add `in' before journal name}{in style for incollection}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Final punctuation}
% The punctuation at the end of the reference is normally a period. This
% may be suppressed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{FINAL PUNCTUATION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Period at very end}{of the listed reference}
\optdef{x}{fin-bare}{No period at end}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Abbreviations}
% A number of words may be abbreviated: pages, editors, volume, chapter,
% and so on. The first two may be independently set to abbreviation, the
% rest with a single option.
%
% Additionally, the edition numbers may be
% output as words (first, second, etc.) or as numbers (1st, 2nd, etc.).
% (Recall that the input in the \texttt{.bib} file is always as English
% words.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'
 (if not using external language file)}
 {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}
\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc}
\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'
 (if abbreviating words)}
 {\if\ans a*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{}
\optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.}
\optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc}
\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The above choices about abbreviations are made only if the internal
% languages are taken (English or \texttt{babel}). For an external language
% definition file, these choices, along with possible other ones, are made
% in the external file, which is read in at this point.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\umes{Reading external language file \string\cfile=\cfile}%
\if!\cfile!\relax\else
 \input\cfile
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% This file contains the standard set of stored journal names present in
% the basic bibliography style files. If other files containing journal
% names are to be included, they may only contain the options \texttt{jabr}
% or \texttt{jaa} since these options are selected here. No option
% menus from the journal-name files will be read in.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{STORED JOURNAL NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Full journal names}{for prestored journals}
\optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviated journal names}{}
\optdef{s}{jabr,jaa}{Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands}{like ApJ and AJ}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Variations on \textsl{and}}
% It is possible to replace the word \textsl{and} with an ampersand \&, and to
% specify whether a comma is to precede \textsl{and} in a list of more than two
% names.
%
% A variable \textsl{and} may be provided for with the command |\BIBand|
% in place of the word. In this case, the command must be defined in the
% document file or some other package called. (This is intended for situations
% where an ampersand is wanted in parenthetical citations, but the word in
% textual ones.)
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{AMPERSAND:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Use word `and'}{in author lists}
\optdef{a}{amper}{Use ampersand}{in place of `and'}
\optdef{v}{varand}{Use \string\BIBand}{in place of `and'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, and Harry'}
\optdef{n}{and-xcom}{No comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick and Harry'}
\optdef{c}{and-com}{Comma even with 2 authors}{as `Tom, and Harry'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS
 (if using comma before `and' with authors)}
 {\if\ans c*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{and-com-ed}{Comma with 2 editors}{in collections}
\optdef{x}{}{Two editors without comma}{as `Tom and Harry'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{With `and'}{before last author in reference list}
\optdef{x}{xand}{No `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, Harry'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup

\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `ET AL':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `et al'}{in reference list}
\optdef{x}{etal-xc}{No comma before `et al'}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Font of \textsl{et al}}
% One can chose that \textsl{et~al.}\ be put into italics.
% Or, if the authors are in a different font from the regular one, the
% \textsl{et~al.}\ can still be Roman.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF `ET AL':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Plain et al}{}
\optdef{i}{etal-it}{Italic et al}{}
\optdef{r}{etal-rm}{Roman et al}{even when authors something else}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Additional Data Fields}\label{sec:revtex}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the revdata option group}
% The American Physical Society's REV\TeX\ package contains \btx\ support
% with a \texttt{bst} file generated from a variant of
% \texttt{\filename}. The extra fields are also available here.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \textbf{collaboration}: A collaboration name associated with a
% reference.
% \item \textbf{eprint}: The e-print citation for the reference (Los Alamos
% or otherwise). E-print numbers can be turned into hyperlinks to the
% online article. The output is\\
%    \hspace*{2em}|\eprint{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|
% \item \textbf{archive}: is an optional argument for |\eprint|, as\\
%    \hspace*{2em}|\eprint[|\textit{archive-des}|]{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|\\
% The \textit{archive-des} is some code such as \texttt{arXiv} that is
% translated to a base URL by a class or package file. The default definition
% of |\eprint| ignores \textit{archive-des} and prints \textit{eprint-spec}
% as a URL.
% \item \textbf{url}: A URL associated with the reference. Can be turned
% into a hyperlink.
% \end{itemize}
%
% A collaboration appears as part of the author list and the other two
% appear at the end of the citaton. The URL field can be selected
% independently of this option.
%
% In addition there are new fields for journals like Phys.\ Rev.~D that
% no longer use page numbers.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \textbf{eid}: Electronic article identifier.
% \item \textbf{numpages}: Number of pages in an article. For use in
% conjunction with the \textbf{eid} field when page counts are
% desired. Deprecated when submitting to Phys.\ Rev.
%
% The \texttt{eprint} (with \texttt{archive}) and \texttt{url} fields may be
% included independently of the other REV\TeX\ fields.
%
% The \texttt{eid} field is now always included, although it is optional for
% the bibliography entries. This electronic identifier is a replacement for the
% page number in electronic journals: it is the sequence number in the printed
% volume. If present, it will be used in place of the page number.
%
% \end{itemize}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No additional fields}{for REVTeX}
\optdef{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk}{Include REVTeX data fields}
 {collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, numpages, url}
\getans
\mytemptrue
\if\ans r\mytempfalse\fi
\beginoptiongroup{E-PRINT DATA FIELD:
(without REVTeX fields)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}
\optdef{*}{}{Do not include eprint field}{}
\optdef{e}{eprint}{Include eprint and archive fields}{for electronic publications}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{URL address}
% For electronic documents with an Internet address, add a URL entry.
% Harvard already has this, but here it is done for all styles.
% The URL text will be set with the \verb!\url! command in the \texttt{url}
% package by Donald Arseneau. This package must be loaded for the command
% to work right. It allows line breaks at punctuations. Otherwise,
% \verb!\texttt! is used instead, with no line breaks. The URL text is preceded
% by \verb!\urlprefix! which defaults to ``URL '' but may be redefined by the
% user to be whatever s/he wants. The final space must be included.
%
% Note: selecting the REV\TeX\ fields automatically includes this, so the
% offer only is made if REV\TeX\ has been rejected.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{URL ADDRESS:
(without REVTeX fields)}{\ifmytemp*\fi}
\optdef{*}{}{No URL}{for electronic (Internet) documents}
\optdef{u}{url,url-blk}{Include URL}{as regular item block}
\optdef{n}{url,url-nt}{URL as note}{}
\optdef{l}{url,url-nl}{URL on new line}{after rest of reference}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Reference Component Tagging}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the bibinfo option group}
% If reference component tagging is enabled, we
% apply tags like |\bibinfo| and |\eprint| to the fields of data
% in the content of the |\bibitem| statement. We also ensure that
% these commands have a default meaning within the scope of the |thebibliography|
% environment. The default definitions simply print the field and ignore the
% tag. However, other programs or packages might make use of the tag
% information to separate authors from title, for example.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No reference component tags}
 {in the \string\bibitem\space entries}
\optdef{b}{bibinfo}{Reference component tags}
 {like \string\bibinfo\space in the content of \string\bibitem}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Define emphasis}
% In everything that been mentioned so far, italicization should be
% understood to mean `emphasize' in the \LaTeX{} sense. This means that the
% command |\em| is used. This is not the same as |\it|, which is always
% italics. Rather, with |\em|, the font style switches between |\rm| and
% |\it| depending on the context. Here one may choose to true italics, or
% to switch off italics altogether.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{EMPHASIS:
 (affects all so-called italics)}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Use emphasis}{ie, \string\em, allows font switching}
\optdef{i}{em-it}{Use true italics}{ie, \string\it, absolute italics}
\optdef{x}{em-x}{No italics}{at all}
\optdef{u}{em-ul}{Underlining}{in place of italics, best with ulem package}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Plain \TeX\ compatibility}
% Bold face, italics, and emphasis are made with the \LaTeXe\ commands,
% which makes them incompatible with the obsolete \LaTeX2.09, and with
% Plain \TeX. There are also some extra testing for existing commands
% that best work with \LaTeXe\ syntax.
%
% If the bibliography style file is to be fully compatible with Plain \TeX,
% do not select the option \texttt{nfss} but do take \texttt{plntx}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX:}{}
\optdef{*}{nfss}{Use LaTeX commands}{which may not work with Plain TeX}
\optdef{t}{plntx}{Use only Plain TeX}{commands for fonts and testing}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Terminate the options list. If a language definition file has been called,
% then we have a closing brace too many, so add another dummy opening brace.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if!\cfile\jfile!\else
\begingroup\MBswitch
\wr(,{\pc)
\endgroup
\fi

\endoptions
%</options>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
%
% \section{The Bibliographic Coding}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>
%<*!tail>
 %   For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
 %-------------------------------------------------------------------
%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
 %  WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING
 %  The input dbj file contains one of the options
%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> %        nmft-it, nmft-bf, nmft-sc, or nmft-def
%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> %        lab-it, lab-bf, lab-sc, or lab-def
 %  without the corresponding general option(s):
%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> %              nmft
%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> %              lab
 %  (You may be using an older dbj with a newer version of merlin.mbs)
 %  Please edit your dbj file to add the general option(s) and reprocess.
 %
%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
%<*!exlang>
%<!babel> % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
%<*babel>
 % This bibliography style file requires a file named  babelbst.tex
 %   containing the definitions of word commands like \bbleditor, etc.
%</babel>
%</!exlang>
%<*exlang>
 % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in
%<bahasa> %   BAHASA
%<brazilian> %   BRAZILIAN
%<catalan> %   CATALAN
%<croatian> %   CROATIAN
%<czech> %   CZECH
%<danish> %   DANISH
%<dansk> %   DANSK
%<dutch> %   DUTCH
%<english> %   ENGLISH
%<esperanto> %   ESPERANTO
%<finnish> %   FINNISH
%<french> %   FRENCH
%<galacian> %   GALACIAN
%<german> %   GERMAN
%<hungarian> %   HUNGARIAN
%<italian> %   ITALIAN
%<norwegian> %   NORWEGIAN
%<norsk> %   NORWEGIAN
%<polski> %   POLISH
%<polish> %   POLISH
%<portuguese> %   PORTUGUESE
%<romanian> %   ROMANIAN
%<russian> %   RUSSIAN
%<slovak> %   SLOVAK
%<slovenian> %   SLOVENIAN
%<slovene> %   SLOVENIAN
%<spanish> %   SPANISH
%<swedish> %   SWEDISH
%<turkish> %   TURKISH
%</exlang>
%<*!html>
%<*ay>
 % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
 % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
 % Such a package is    natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
%<*alk>
 % or:                  apalike.sty  by Oren Patashnik
 % The form of the \bibitem entries is
 %   \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{key}...
%</alk>
%<*!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)>
 % The form of the \bibitem entries is
 %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
%<nat> %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
 % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
 % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
 % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
 % parenthesis!
%<nat> % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
 % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
 % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
 % be parentheses in the label.
 % The \cite command functions as follows:
 %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
%<nat> %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
 %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
%<nat> %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
 %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
 %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
 %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
 %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
%<nat> %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
 %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
%</!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)>
%<*har>
 % or:                  harvard.sty  by Peter Williams and Thorsten Schnier
%<harnm> % (needs natbib v5.3  or  harvard v2.0.3)
 % The form of the bibitem entries is
 %   \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Smith}{1990}{key}...
%</har>
%<*cay>
 % or:                  chicago.sty
 % The form of the bibitem entries is
 %   \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Baker, and Smith}
 %        {Jones et al.}{1990}{key}...
%</cay>
%<*nmd>
 % or:                  named.sty
 % The form of the bibitem entries is
 %   \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}...
%</nmd>
%<*ast>
 % or:                  astron.sty
 % The form of the bibitem entries is
 %   \bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}...
%</ast>
%<*cn>
 % or:                  authordate1-4.sty
 % The form of the bibitem entries is
 %   \bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al.}1990]{key}...
%</cn>
%</ay>
%<*!ay>
%<*!alph&!cite>
 % This is a numerical citation style, and as such is standard LaTeX.
%</!alph&!cite>
%<*alph>
 % This is a labelled citation style similar to the standard alpha.bst,
 %   where labels are of the form Dal90 or DBK89.
%</alph>
%<*cite&!alph>
 % This is a special pseudo-numerical bibliography style, intended to be
 %   used to list all the entries in a bib database
%</cite&!alph>
 % It requires no extra package to interface to the main text.
 % The form of the \bibitem entries is
%<!alph&!cite> %   \bibitem{key}...
%<alph> %   \bibitem[label]{key}...
%<!alph&cite> %   \bibitem[key]{key}...
%<*!cite|alph>
 % Usage of \cite is as follows:
%<*!alph&!cite>
 %   \cite{key} ==>>          [#]
 %   \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [#, chap. 2]
 % where # is a number determined by the ordering in the reference list.
%</!alph&!cite>
%<*alph>
 %   \cite{key} ==>>          [label]
 %   \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [label, chap. 2]
 % The order in the reference list is by label.
%</alph>
%<*seq-no&!alph>
 % The order in the reference list is that by which the works were originally
 %   cited in the text, or that in the database.
%</seq-no&!alph>
%<*!seq-no&!alph>
 % The order in the reference list is alphabetical by authors.
%</!seq-no&!alph>
%</!cite|alph>
%</!ay>
%</!html>
%<*html>
 % This bibliographic style file produces HTML output instead of LaTeX.
 % The LaTeX special characters are not translated, so that the output
 % (which has the .bbl ending still) will have to be further massaged,
 % and renamed with .html or .htm. The title and heading may also need
 % to be revised.
 %
%<htlist&!htdes> % The output is a numbered list.
%<htdes> % The output is an unnumbered list with the keys printed
%<htdes> % before each entry.
%<!htlist&!htdes> % The output is lists each entry as one paragraph.
%</html>
 %---------------------------------------------------------------------

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`ENTRY'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add URL entry type for \texttt{harnm} option}
%  The new \texttt{harvard.sty} of \LaTeXe{} includes an entry URL, or
%  rather it is included in the new \texttt{.bst} files for it. Add it
%  here too, but only for option \texttt{harnm}.
%
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add optional entries \texttt{isbn}}
% Books normally have an ISBN number.
% This entry is (optionally) included, modelled after that in
% \texttt{xbtxbst.doc}.
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the \texttt{revdata} data}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
ENTRY
  { address
%<annote>    annote
%<eprint>    archive
    author
    booktitle
    chapter
%<revdata>    collaboration
%<doi>    doi
    edition
    editor
    eid
%<eprint>    eprint
    howpublished
    institution
%<isbn>    isbn
%<issn>    issn
    journal
    key
%<lang>    language
    month
    note
    number
%<revdata>    numpages
    organization
    pages
    publisher
    school
    series
    title
    type
%<url|harnm|revdata>    url
    volume
    year
  }
  {}
%<!ay&!alph>  { label }
%<!ay&alph>  { label extra.label sort.label }
%<ay>  { label extra.label sort.label short.list }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`init.state.consts'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
{ #0 'before.all :=
  #1 'mid.sentence :=
  #2 'after.sentence :=
  #3 'after.block :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% |s| and |t| are general-purpose scratch registers whose value does not persist
% past the end of a function. They also do not appear to be used to communicate
% between functions or to be clobbered within a sub-function call. Hopefully.
%    \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS { s t}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`output.nonnull'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
{ 's :=
  output.state mid.sentence =
%<!blk-com|(!com-semi&!com-blank)>    { ", " * write$ }
%<blk-com&com-semi>    { "; " * write$ }
%<blk-com&!com-semi&com-blank>    { " " * write$ }
    { output.state after.block =
        { add.period$ write$
          newline$
%<!html>          "\newblock " write$
        }
        { output.state before.all =
            'write$
            { add.period$ " " * write$ }
          if$
        }
      if$
      mid.sentence 'output.state :=
    }
  if$
  s
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`output'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {output}
{ duplicate$ empty$
    'pop$
    'output.nonnull
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`output.check'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {output.check}
{ 't :=
  duplicate$ empty$
    { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
    'output.nonnull
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`fin.entry'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add annotation}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: make ``babel compatible''}
% I have often been asked to add an annotation function. This suggestion is
% from Soren Dayton; it inputs a file with the same name as the cite key, or
% uses the text in the \texttt{annote} field. It will only work with \LaTeXe.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {fin.entry}
%<*!fin-bare>
{ add.period$
  write$
%</!fin-bare>
%<*fin-bare>
{ duplicate$ empty$
    'pop$
    'write$
  if$
%</fin-bare>
%<html&htdes>  "</dd>" write$
%<html&!htdes&htlist>  "</li>" write$
%<html&!htdes&!htlist>  "</p>" write$
  newline$
%<*annote>
%<*!html>
  annote missing$
    { "\bibAnnoteFile{" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$ }
    { "\bibAnnote{" cite$ * "}{" * annote * "}" * write$ newline$
    }
  if$
%</!html>
%<*html>
  "<blockquote><strong>Key:</strong> "
  cite$ * write$
  annote missing$
    { newline$ }
    { "<br><strong>Annotation:</strong>" write$ newline$
      annote write$ newline$
    }
  if$
  "</blockquote>" write$ newline$
%</html>
%</annote>
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.block'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {new.block}
{ output.state before.all =
    'skip$
    { after.block 'output.state := }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {new.sentence}
{ output.state after.block =
    'skip$
    { output.state before.all =
        'skip$
        { after.sentence 'output.state := }
      if$
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`add.blank'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 10}{Add function}
% When text is printed with \texttt{output} or
% \texttt{output.check}, the \texttt{output.state} is set such that
% a comma will precede the next output text. For special effects, we want to
% suppress this comma, inserting a blank instead. Hence the
% \texttt{output.state} is changed to \texttt{before.all}, meaning no
% punctuation is to be inserted.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {add.blank}
{  " " * before.all 'output.state :=
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`add.colon'}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add macro}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Simplify: just tack on colon}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*au-col|tit-col>
FUNCTION {add.colon}
{ duplicate$ empty$
    'skip$
    { ":" * add.blank }
  if$
}

%</au-col|tit-col>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`no.blank.or.punct'}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add function}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 30}{Present only for option \texttt{yrpp-xsp}}
% Another frill is to suppresss both blanks and punctuation. The |\hspace|
% permits a line break at this point.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*yrpp-xsp>
FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
%<*!html>
{  "\hspace{0pt}" * before.all 'output.state :=
}
%</!html>
%<html>{  before.all 'output.state := }

%</yrpp-xsp>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`date.block'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 9}{Add function}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 25}{Add option \texttt{yrp-per}}
% The \texttt{date.block} function is used for special punctuating effects
% after the date.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {date.block}
{
%<*!yrp-x>
%<yrp-col>  ":" *
%<*!yrp-col>
%<yrp-semi>  ";" *
%<*!yrp-semi>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&!yrp-per>  skip$
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&yrp-per>  new.sentence
%</!yrp-semi>
%</!yrp-col>
%</!yrp-x>
%<*yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi>
%<!yrpp-xsp>  add.blank
%<yrpp-xsp>  no.blank.or.punct
%</yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi>
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`not'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {not}
{   { #0 }
    { #1 }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`and'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {and}
{   'skip$
    { pop$ #0 }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`or'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {or}
{   { pop$ #1 }
    'skip$
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`non.stop'}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 8}{Add to test if last character
%   is punctuation: . ! ?}
% This function (my invention) tests if the last character in the string
% on the stack is \texttt{. ! ?} by using \texttt{add.period\$}. It is to
% be used for conditional italic correction or adding commas.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!tit-it&tit-qq>
FUNCTION {non.stop}
{ duplicate$
   "}" * add.period$
   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
}

%</!tit-it&tit-qq>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`remove.dots'}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Add macro}
% This macro removes any periods from the string on the stack. To be used
% for undotting journal names, months, and juniors. Previously
% \texttt{purify\$} was used for this, but that removes more than just
% dots.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper>
STRINGS {z}
FUNCTION {remove.dots}
{ 'z :=
  ""
  { z empty$ not }
  { z #1 #1 substring$
    z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
    duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
      { * }
    if$
  }
  while$
}
%</nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checka'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {new.block.checka}
{ empty$
    'skip$
    'new.block
  if$
}
%</!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checkb'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
{ empty$
  swap$ empty$
  and
    'skip$
    'new.block
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checka'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka}
{ empty$
    'skip$
    'new.sentence
  if$
}
%</!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checkb'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb}
{ empty$
  swap$ empty$
  and
    'skip$
    'new.sentence
  if$
}
%</!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`field.or.null'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {field.or.null}
{ duplicate$ empty$
    { pop$ "" }
    'skip$
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`emphasize'}
% Emphasis can be either italic or the alternating font. The font command
% may be NFSS or regular \LaTeX~2.09 declarations.
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option}
%\changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Add \texttt{em-ul} option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {emphasize}
%<*!em-x>
{ duplicate$ empty$
    { pop$ "" }
%<html>    { "<i>" swap$ * "</i>" * }
%<*!html>
%<em-ul>    { "\uline{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<*!em-ul>
%<*!nfss>
%<!em-it>    { "{\em " swap$ * "\/}" * }
%<em-it>    { "{\it " swap$ * "\/}" * }
%</!nfss>
%<*nfss>
%<!em-it>    { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<em-it>    { "\textit{" swap$ * "}" * }
%</nfss>
%</!em-ul>
%</!html>
  if$
}
%</!em-x>
%<em-x>{ skip$ }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bolden'}
% The bold font command may be NFSS or the regular \LaTeX~2.09 declaration.
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf>
FUNCTION {bolden}
{ duplicate$ empty$
    { pop$ "" }
%<html>    { "<b>" swap$ * "</b>" * }
%<*!html>
%<!nfss>    { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * }
%<nfss>    { "\textbf{" swap$ * "}" * }
%</!html>
  if$
}
%</nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`scaps'}
% To put text into small caps.
%\changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add function}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc>
FUNCTION {scaps}
{ duplicate$ empty$
    { pop$ "" }
%<html>    { skip$ }
%<*!html>
%<!nfss>    { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * }
%<nfss>    { "\textsc{" swap$ * "}" * }
%</!html>
  if$
}
%</lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`roman.list'}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add function}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function}
% \begin{macro}{`roman.cite'}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 16}{Add function}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bib.name.font'}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro}
% \begin{macro}{`bib.fname.font'}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro}
% \begin{macro}{`cite.name.font'}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro}
% Define functions for formatting the author/editor names, one for the
% surnames (\texttt{bib.name.font}) and one for the first names
% (\texttt{bib.fname.font}). These could be identical, or the latter is
% deactivated if first names are not to be formatted, only the last names.
%
% For citations, we have \texttt{cite.name.font}. Here only surnames appear.
%
% It is also possible to have a user-defined font command for each, which the
% user must define in his work. These are |\bibnamefont{}| and |\bibfnamefont{}|,
% and some defaults are provided that simply repeat the arguments. Two commands
% are needed if \texttt{nmft-def} and \texttt{fnm-def} are both given.
%
% If neither \texttt{fnm-def} nor \texttt{fnm-rm} are given, then the first names
% are formatted the same as the surnames.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*nmft>
FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
%<nmft-it>{ emphasize }
%<!nmft-it&nmft-bf>{ bolden }
%<!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&nmft-sc>{ scaps }
%<*!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def>
{ duplicate$ empty$
  { pop$ "" }
%<!html>  { "\bibnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<html>  { skip$ }
  if$
}
%</!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def>
FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
%<!fnm-rm&!fnm-def>{ bib.name.font }
%<fnm-rm>{ skip$ }
%<*!fnm-rm&fnm-def>
{ duplicate$ empty$
  { pop$ "" }
%<!html>  { "\bibfnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<html>  { skip$ }
  if$
}
%</!fnm-rm&fnm-def>
%</nmft>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*lab>
FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
%<lab-it>{ emphasize }
%<!lab-it&lab-bf>{ bolden }
%<!lab-it&!lab-bf&lab-sc>{ scaps }
%<*!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def>
{ duplicate$ empty$
  { pop$ "" }
%<!html>  { "\citenamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<html>  { skip$ }
  if$
}
%</!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def>
%</lab>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`tie.or.space.prefix'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: replace \texttt{tie.or.space.connect} with
%   more flexible function}
% The function \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} determines whether
% the top item on the stack requires a tie character and
% slips that (or a space character if not) ahead of it.
% At this point a font switch or other function can be applied to
% the top item on the stack, and the appropriate space found
% just ahead of it on the stack.
%
% The sequence \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} \texttt{*} \texttt{*} is a common idiom
% for joining the top two stack objects with a tie or space
% depending on the length of the top object.
%
% Another idiom is to apply \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix}, apply a font switch,
% and then swap and join. In this case the tie or space follows the object.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
    { "~" }
    { " " }
  if$
  swap$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`capitalize'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 7}{Add capitalizing function}
% Capitalizing is easy for regular languages, but for \texttt{babel},
% some trickery stuff is needed; definitions of |\capitalize| and
% |\Capitalize| are written to the \texttt{.bbl} file.
%    \begin{macrocode}

FUNCTION {capitalize}
%<!babel>{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ }
%<babel>{ "\capitalize" swap$ * }

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`space.word'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to space out words; necessary
%          for the multilingual functions.}
% The function \texttt{space.word} adds a space before and after the word or
% words currently on the stack. This was added for the \texttt{bbl.}$nnn$
% functions, that contain only a word without spacing, but replace explicit
% text in the originals that were spaced out. Its seems more flexible to
% define the word functions to be without spacing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {space.word}
{ " " swap$ * " " * }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
 % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
 % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!exlang>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bbl.xxx'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Replace all explicit words with functions
%     of the form \texttt{bbl.xxx}.}
% \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 15}{Add option \texttt{varand}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ednx}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Jun 9}{Make \texttt{\char`\\BIBand} protected}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add \texttt{bbl.eidpp}}
% These are the default English words. There is no default language
% option: one of \texttt{english} or \texttt{babel} must be given.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!babel>
 % The language selected here is ENGLISH
FUNCTION {bbl.and}
%<!varand|html>{ "and"}
%<varand&!html>{ "\protect\BIBand{}"}

FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
{ "et~al." }

FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
%<!ed>{ "editors" }
%<ed>{ "eds." }

FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
%<!ed>{ "editor" }
%<ed>{ "ed." }

FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
{ "edited by" }

FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
%<!abr>{ "edition" }
%<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." }
%<abr&ednx>{ "ed." }

FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
%<!abr>{ "volume" }
%<abr>{ "vol." }

FUNCTION {bbl.of}
{ "of" }

FUNCTION {bbl.number}
%<!abr>{ "number" }
%<abr>{ "no." }

FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
{ "no." }

FUNCTION {bbl.in}
{ "in" }

FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" }
%<pp>{ "pp." }
%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }

FUNCTION {bbl.page}
%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" }
%<pp>{ "p." }
%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }

%<*revdata>
FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
{ "pages" }

%</revdata>
FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
%<!abr>{ "chapter" }
%<abr>{ "chap." }

FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
%<!abr>{ "Technical Report" }
%<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." }

FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
{ "Master's thesis" }

FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
{ "Ph.D. thesis" }

%<*!xedn>
FUNCTION {bbl.first}
%<!ord>{ "First" }
%<ord>{ "1st" }

FUNCTION {bbl.second}
%<!ord>{ "Second" }
%<ord>{ "2nd" }

FUNCTION {bbl.third}
%<!ord>{ "Third" }
%<ord>{ "3rd" }

FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
%<!ord>{ "Fourth" }
%<ord>{ "4th" }

FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
%<!ord>{ "Fifth" }
%<ord>{ "5th" }

FUNCTION {bbl.st}
{ "st" }

FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
{ "nd" }

FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
{ "rd" }

FUNCTION {bbl.th}
{ "th" }

%</!xedn>
%<*!abr>
MACRO {jan} {"January"}

MACRO {feb} {"February"}

MACRO {mar} {"March"}

MACRO {apr} {"April"}

MACRO {may} {"May"}

MACRO {jun} {"June"}

MACRO {jul} {"July"}

MACRO {aug} {"August"}

MACRO {sep} {"September"}

MACRO {oct} {"October"}

MACRO {nov} {"November"}

MACRO {dec} {"December"}

%</!abr>
%<*abr>
MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}

MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}

MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}

MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}

MACRO {may} {"May"}

MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}

MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}

MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}

MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}

MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}

MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}

MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}

%</abr>
%</!babel>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Here are the definitions for \texttt{babel} option, i.e., explicit
% translations are not used, but rather only \LaTeX{} macros that must be
% defined in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}. This could allow automatic
% language selection.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*babel>
 % The BABEL language selection is made here; definitions in babelbst.tex.
FUNCTION {bbl.and}
{ "\bbland{}"}

FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
{ "\bbletal{}"}

FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
%<!ed>{ "\bbleditors{}" }
%<ed>{ "\bbleds{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
%<!ed>{ "\bbleditor{}" }
%<ed>{ "\bbled{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
{ "\bbledby{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
%<!abr>{ "\bbledition{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bbledn{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
%<!abr>{ "\bblvolume{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bblvol{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.of}
{ "\bblof{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.number}
%<!abr>{ "\bblnumber{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bblno{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
{ "\bblno{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.in}
{ "\bblin{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpages{}" }
%<pp>{ "\bblpp{}" }
%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }

FUNCTION {bbl.page}
%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpage{}" }
%<pp>{ "\bblp{}" }
%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }

FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
%<!abr>{ "\bblchapter{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bblchap{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
%<!abr>{ "\bbltechreport{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bbltechrep{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
{ "\bblmthesis{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
{ "\bblphdthesis{}" }

%<*revdata>
FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
{ "\bbleidpp{}" }

%</revdata>
%<*!xedn>
FUNCTION {bbl.first}
%<!ord>{ "\bblfirst{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblfirsto{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.second}
%<!ord>{ "\bblsecond{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblsecondo{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.third}
%<!ord>{ "\bblthird{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblthirdo{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
%<!ord>{ "\bblfourth{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblfourtho{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
%<!ord>{ "\bblfifth{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblfiftho{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.st}
{ "\bblst{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
{ "\bblnd{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
{ "\bblrd{}" }

FUNCTION {bbl.th}
{ "\bblth{}" }

%</!xedn>
MACRO {jan} {"\bbljan{}"}

MACRO {feb} {"\bblfeb{}"}

MACRO {mar} {"\bblmar{}"}

MACRO {apr} {"\bblapr{}"}

MACRO {may} {"\bblmay{}"}

MACRO {jun} {"\bbljun{}"}

MACRO {jul} {"\bbljul{}"}

MACRO {aug} {"\bblaug{}"}

MACRO {sep} {"\bblsep{}"}

MACRO {oct} {"\bbloct{}"}

MACRO {nov} {"\bblnov{}"}

MACRO {dec} {"\bbldec{}"}

%</babel>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`eng.ord'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to format English ordinals.}
% This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if
% the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits.
% So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is
% sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further
% languages.
%
% This function must be included with \texttt{babel} too, since that includes
% English. This means that the language definition files must also provide
% for |\bblst|, |\bblnd|, and |\bblrd|, setting them all equal to |\bblth|.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*(english|!exlang)&!xedn>
FUNCTION {eng.ord}
{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
     { bbl.th * }
     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
       duplicate$ "1" =
         { pop$ bbl.st * }
         { duplicate$ "2" =
             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
             { "3" =
                 { bbl.rd * }
                 { bbl.th * }
               if$
             }
           if$
          }
       if$
     }
   if$
}

%</(english|!exlang)&!xedn>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!exlang>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!tail>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!head>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!jabr>
MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"}

MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"}

MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"}

MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"}

MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"}

MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"}

MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"}

MACRO {ieeetcad}
 {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"}

MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"}

MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"}

MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"}

MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"}

MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"}

MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"}

MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"}

MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"}

MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"}

MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"}

MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"}

MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"}
%</!jabr>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Revise journal abbreviations}
% Journal abbreviations have been revised from the original Patashnik
% ones with help of Conrado Badenas and the IUA recommendations.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*jabr>
MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}

MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}

MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}

MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}

MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}

MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}

MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}

MACRO {ieeetcad}
 {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}

MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}

MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}

MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}

MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}

MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}

MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}

MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}

MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}

MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}

MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}

MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}

MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}

%</jabr>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.check'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO:
%   add functions \texttt{bibinfo.check}, \texttt{bibinfo.warn},
%   and \texttt{format.eprint}}
%   Define functions that encapsulate the argument
% in a \TeX\ macro that allows for further processing when the
% bibliography is processed, or allows for a separate computer
% program to parse the |\bibitem| contents.
%
% The following table summarizes how each of the \btx{} entries
% is accessed for output; these are the points where
% the \texttt{format.bibinfo} or \texttt{bibinfo.check} functions
% are called.
% \subsubsection*{Trapped via \texttt{format.bibinfo}}
% \begin{description}
% \item[  \texttt{author}        ]\texttt{format.names}
% \item[  \texttt{collaboration} ]\texttt{format.authors}
% \item[  \texttt{doi}           ]\texttt{format.doi}
% \item[  \texttt{editor}        ]\texttt{format.editors} (\texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{format.names.ed} (\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle})
% \item[  \texttt{eid}           ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} (\texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, article) checks the output from \texttt{format.journal.pages}
% \item[  \texttt{isbn}          ]\texttt{format.isbn}
% \item[  \texttt{issn}          ]\texttt{format.issn}
% \item[  \texttt{journal}       ]\texttt{format.article.crossref}, article
% \item[  \texttt{numpages}      ]\texttt{format.journal.eid}
% \item[  \texttt{organization}  ]\texttt{format.organization.address} (\texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{manual}
% \item[  \texttt{pages}         ]\texttt{format.book}.pages (\texttt{book}, \texttt{booklet}), \texttt{format.pages} (\texttt{format.journal.pages}, \texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{article}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings})
% \item[  \texttt{publisher}     ]\texttt{format.publisher.address} (like \texttt{output.check}, \texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings})
% \item[  \texttt{title}         ]\texttt{format.title}, \texttt{format.btitle}, \texttt{misc}, \texttt{presort}, \texttt{bib.sort.order}
% \item[  \texttt{volume}        ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.book.crossref}
% \item[  \texttt{year}          ]in optional argument of \texttt{\char`\\bibitem}, \texttt{format.date} (as part of date), \texttt{format.year}, \texttt{format.org.or.pub}
% \item[  \texttt{booktitle}     ]\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} (\texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}), \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
% \item[  \texttt{howpublished}  ]\texttt{booklet}, \texttt{misc}
% \item[  \texttt{edition}       ]\texttt{convert.edition.format.edition}
% \item[  \texttt{institution}   ]\texttt{techreport}
% \item[  \texttt{school}        ]\texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}
% \item[  \texttt{address}       ]\texttt{format.org.or.pub}, \texttt{booklet}, \texttt{manual}, \texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}, \texttt{techreport}
% \item[  \texttt{chapter}       ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}
% \item[  \texttt{number}        ]\texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.tr.number}
% \item[  \texttt{series}        ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.book.crossref}
% \item[  \texttt{type}          ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{format.thesis.type}, \texttt{format.tr.number}
% \item[  \texttt{month}         ]\texttt{format.date}
% \item[  \texttt{note}          ]\texttt{format.note}
% \item[  \texttt{annote}        ]\texttt{fin.entry}
% \end{description}
%
% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\url}}
% \begin{description}
% \item[  \texttt{url}           ]\texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\harvardurl}, \texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.note} (\texttt{\char`\\url})
% \end{description}
%
% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\eprint}}
% \begin{description}
% \item[  \texttt{eprint}        ]\texttt{format.eprint}
% \item[  \texttt{archive}       ]\texttt{format.eprint}
% \end{description}
%
% \subsubsection*{Not encapsulated:}
% \begin{description}
% \item[  \texttt{key}           ]cite key
% \item[  \texttt{language}      ]operand of \texttt{\char`\\selectlanguage}
% \end{description}
%
% \subsubsection*{\texttt{bibinfo} tag, but not a \btx{} field}
% \begin{description}
% \item[  \texttt{date}          ]\texttt{format.date}
% \end{description}
%
% Provides robust access to fields, checking against \texttt{missing\$}
% and \texttt{empty\$}. A \dtx{} option allows giving
% a warning if either is the case.
%
% If not, it encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\bibinfo|.
% The encapsulation is enabled by the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option:
% if turned off, it simply pops the unneeded object.
%
% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field}
%
% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty}
% Side effect: warning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
{ swap$
  duplicate$ missing$
    {
%<bibinfo.warning>      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
%<!bibinfo.warning>      pop$ pop$
      ""
    }
    { duplicate$ empty$
        {
%<bibinfo.warning>          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
%<!bibinfo.warning>          swap$ pop$
        }
        { swap$
%<bibinfo>          "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" *
%<!bibinfo>          pop$
        }
      if$
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.warn'}
% Replaces \texttt{output.check}
% with \texttt{bibinfo.warn} followed by \texttt{output}.
%
% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field}
%
% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty}
%
% Side effect: warning if the field is empty.
% Note: if the \dtx{} option \texttt{bibinfo} is not in effect,
% then no encapsulation is done.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
{ swap$
  duplicate$ missing$
    {
      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
      ""
    }
    { duplicate$ empty$
        {
          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
        }
        { swap$
%<bibinfo>          "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" *
%<!bibinfo>          pop$
        }
      if$
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.eprint'}
% \changes{4.00}{2000 Jan 21}{Add optional archive field}
% The access function for the \texttt{eprint} field.
%
% If the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option is selected, then this function
% encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\eprint|.
%
% \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-URL}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eprint>
FUNCTION {format.eprint}
{ eprint duplicate$ empty$
    'skip$
    { "\eprint"
      archive empty$
        'skip$
        { "[" * archive * "]" * }
      if$
      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
    }
  if$
}
%</eprint>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`write.url'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{write.url} for option
%   \texttt{harnm}}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Apply to non-Harvard styles}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Fix bug when both harnm and url-nl given}
% This function taken over from \texttt{agsm.sty}, the main \texttt{harvard}
% bib style. For non-Harvard styles that want to add the URL on a new line
% after the reference, use this function too, but defined slightly
% differently.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>
FUNCTION {write.url}
%<*!html>
{ url empty$
    { skip$ }
%<harnm>    { "\newline\harvardurl{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ }
%<!harnm&url-nl>    { "\newline\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ }
  if$
}
%</!html>
%<*html>
{ url empty$
    { skip$ }
    {  "<br><a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
      * ">" * url * "</a>" *  write$ newline$ }
  if$
}
%</html>

%</(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.url'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 22}{Add function for regular URLs}
% A non-harvard version of URL is also made for regular styles.
% This is used only if the URL text is added as a regular item to the
% reference information, blocked if necessary. Alternatives are on a new line
% (Harvard-like) or in the note.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata>
FUNCTION {format.url}
{ url empty$
    { "" }
%<!html>    { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * }
%<html>    {  "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
%<html>      * ">" * url * "</a>" * }
  if$
}

%</(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`check.speaker'}
% \changes{4.15}{2006 Jan 4}{Add \texttt{presentation}, which needs this function
%                            to highlight speaker name}
% The \texttt{presentation} type uses the \texttt{key} entry to indicate which
% author is the speaker, as the sequence number in the author list. The speaker's
% name is put into a different font, depending on the extra option. If no font
% is specified, all names are the same.
%    \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }

%<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
FUNCTION {check.speaker}
{ key empty$ 'skip$
  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
    {
%<pres-bf>      bolden
%<pres-it&!pres-bf>      emphasize
%<pres-sc&!pres-it&!pres-bf>      scaps
    }
      'skip$
    if$
  }
  if$
}

%</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}

% \begin{macro}{`format.names'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} command for `and' with
%    new option \texttt{harnm}}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Add option \texttt{nm-revf}}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvx}}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvv}}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Jr to go at end with \texttt{nm-rev1} (AGU style)}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Add option \texttt{nmand-rm}}
% \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 30}{Add option \texttt{etal-rm}}
% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{aunm-semi}}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add option \texttt{nm-revv1} (AGU style with full
%      names)}
% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{aunm-sl}}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others''
%         from last format function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate author name for later processing;
%         trap empty author list;
%         bring common braces to outer level for easier understanding of code.}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Add option \texttt{jnrlst} to put Jr. last}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvcx}}
% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvvc}}
% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{etal-xc}}
% The \texttt{harvard} package now (version 2.0.3, for \LaTeXe) uses
% |\harvardand| in place of the word \textsl{and} so that it can be changed
% at run time. This is allowed for with the option \texttt{harnm}, which
% need not be used only with the \texttt{har} option.
% This seems like a useless feature for \texttt{.bst} files made from
% this multilanguage source. However, it is included anyway, which means
% if \texttt{harnm} option selected, one must redefine |\harvardand|
% in the document for the language being used.
%
% The location of the junior part for reversed name is not obvious. Prior
% to version 4.0, I always had it attached to the last name, as
% Smith, Jr, John, put it probably is better as Smith, John, Jr. For the
% AGU \texttt{nm-rev1} I always did it this way, probably because I had a
% good AGU example to follow. Dilemma: do I just change them all or add an
% option to do it? The option will maintain consistency with older
% versions, but this could also be considered a bug fix rather than a new
% feature. Solution: use the option, since I have found other \texttt{.bst}
% files from Beebe and Harvard that put junior between surname and first
% name.
%
% |bibinfo| is a variable used to store a string telling it whether the
% names being formatted are authors or editors, since this function is called
% for both purposes. Every call to this function must push the string onto the stack
% just before the call.
%    \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS  { bibinfo}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Stack note: if the names argument is a non-nil list, this function returns
% one object on the stack, the formatted list of names.
%
% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.names}
{ 'bibinfo :=
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
  's :=
  "" 't :=
  #1 'nameptr :=
  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
  numnames 'namesleft :=
    { namesleft #0 > }
    { s nameptr
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here is the author formatting when the names are not set in any special
% font, or when the entire name set in a single special font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
%<nm-init>      "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-init>
%<nm-rev&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}"
%<nm-rev&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-rev>
%<nm-rv&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{~}}"
%<nm-rv&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ f{~}}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rv>
%<nm-rvx&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{}}"
%<nm-rvx&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ f{}}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvx>
%<nm-rvcx&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{}}"
%<nm-rvcx&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, f{}}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-rvcx>
%<nm-rvv&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{.}.}"
%<nm-rvv&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ f{.}.}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvv>
%<nm-rvvc&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{.}.}"
%<nm-rvvc&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, f{.}.}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-rvvc>
%<nm-revf&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}"
%<nm-revf&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-revf>
      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%</!nm-revf>
%</!nm-rvvc>
%</!nm-rvv>
%</!nm-rvcx>
%</!nm-rvx>
%</!nm-rv>
%</!nm-rev>
%</!nm-init>
%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
%<*nm-rev1>
      duplicate$ #1 >
        { "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }
%<!jnrlst>        { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" }
%<jnrlst>        { "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" }
      if$
%</nm-rev1>
%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
      duplicate$ #1 >
        { "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }
%<!jnrlst>        { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" }
%<jnrlst>        { "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" }
      if$
%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
      format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvx>      remove.dots
%<nmft&nmand-rm>      bib.name.font
%</!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here is the author formatting when the first and last names are
% set in (possibly different) special fonts.
%
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Junior part always in first name font}
% The junior part is optionally between the reversed names, or after them.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
%<*nm-init>
      "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
      if$
      s nameptr
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
      s nameptr
      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-init>
%<*!nm-init>
%<*nm-rev>
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
      s nameptr
%<!jnrlst>      "{jj, }{f.}"
%<jnrlst>      "{f.}{, jj}"
      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-rev>
%<*!nm-rev>
%<*nm-rv>
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
      s nameptr
%<!jnrlst>      "{jj }{f{~}}"
%<jnrlst>      "{f{~}}{ jj}"
      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-rv>
%<*!nm-rv>
%<*nm-rvx>
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
      s nameptr
%<!jnrlst>      "{jj }{f{}}"
%<jnrlst>      "{f{}}{ jj}"
      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-rvx>
%<*!nm-rvx>
%<*nm-rvcx>
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
      s nameptr
%<!jnrlst>      "{jj, }{f{}}"
%<jnrlst>      "{f{}}{, jj}"
      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { remove.dots bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-rvcx>
%<*!nm-rvcx>
%<*nm-rvv>
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
      s nameptr
%<!jnrlst>      "{jj }{f{.}.}"
%<jnrlst>      "{f{.}.}{ jj}"
      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-rvv>
%<*!nm-rvv>
%<*nm-rvvc>
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
      s nameptr
%<!jnrlst>      "{jj, }{f{.}.}"
%<jnrlst>      "{f{.}.}{, jj}"
      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-rvvc>
%<*!nm-rvvc>
%<*nm-revf>
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
      s nameptr
%<!jnrlst>      "{jj, }{ff}"
%<jnrlst>      "{ff}{, jj}"
      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-revf>
%<*!nm-revf>
      "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
      if$
      s nameptr
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
      s nameptr
      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
      if$
%</!nm-revf>
%</!nm-rvvc>
%</!nm-rvv>
%</!nm-rvcx>
%</!nm-rvx>
%</!nm-rv>
%</!nm-rev>
%</!nm-init>
%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
%<*nm-rev1>
      nameptr #1 >
        { "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
            { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
          if$
          s nameptr
          "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
          s nameptr
          "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
            { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
          if$
        }
        { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
          s nameptr
%<!jnrlst>          "{jj, }{f.}"
%<jnrlst>          "{f.}{, jj}"
          format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
            { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
          if$
        }
      if$
%</nm-rev1>
%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
      nameptr #1 >
        { "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
            { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
          if$
          s nameptr
          "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
          s nameptr
          "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
            { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
          if$
        }
        { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
          s nameptr
%<!jnrlst>          "{jj, }{ff}"
%<jnrlst>          "{ff}{, jj}"
          format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
            { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
          if$
        }
      if$
%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
      *
%</nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
      bibinfo bibinfo.check
%<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
      type$ "presentation" =
        { check.speaker }
        'skip$
      if$
%</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
      't :=
      nameptr #1 >
        {
%<*nmlm>
%<m1>          nameptr #1
%<m2>          nameptr #2
%<m3>          nameptr #3
%<m4>          nameptr #4
%<m5>          nameptr #5
%<m6>          nameptr #6
%<m7>          nameptr #7
%<m8>          nameptr #8
%<m9>          nameptr #9
%<m0>          nameptr #0
%<m10>          #10 +
%<m20>          #20 +
%<m30>          #30 +
%<m40>          #40 +
%<m50>          #50 +
%<m60>          #60 +
%<m70>          #70 +
%<m80>          #80 +
%<m90>          #90 +
          #1 + =
%<x1>          numnames #1
%<x2>          numnames #2
%<x3>          numnames #3
%<x4>          numnames #4
%<x5>          numnames #5
%<x6>          numnames #6
%<x7>          numnames #7
%<x8>          numnames #8
%<x9>          numnames #9
%<x0>          numnames #0
%<x10>          #10 +
%<x20>          #20 +
%<x30>          #30 +
%<x40>          #40 +
%<x50>          #50 +
%<x60>          #60 +
%<x70>          #70 +
%<x80>          #80 +
%<x90>          #90 +
          > and
            { "others" 't :=
              #1 'namesleft := }
            'skip$
          if$
%</nmlm>
          namesleft #1 >
%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>            { ", " * t * }
%<aunm-semi>            { "; " * t * }
%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>            { "/ " * t * }
            {
              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
                { 't := }
                { pop$ }
              if$
%<(and-com|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>              "," *
%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-semi>              ";" *
%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>              "/" *
%<*!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand>
              numnames #2 >
%<etal-xc>              t "others" = not and
%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>                { "," * }
%<aunm-semi>                { ";" * }
%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>                { "/" * }
                'skip$
              if$
%</!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand>
              t "others" =
                {
%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  bib.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font *
%<!(nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it>                  " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  bib.name.font
                }
%<*!xand>
                {
%<*!harnm>
%<!amper>                  bbl.and
%<amper>                  "\&"
%</!harnm>
%<harnm>                  "\harvardand{}"
%<nmft&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>                  bib.name.font
                  space.word * t *
                }
%</!xand>
%<xand>                { " " * t * }
              if$
            }
          if$
        }
        't
      if$
      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
    }
  while$
%<*nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
  t "others" =
    'skip$
    { bib.name.font }
  if$
%</nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
  } if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.names.ed'}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add option \texttt{ed-rev} to allow editor
%    to be formatted just like authors'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{and-com-ed} to replace
%     \texttt{and-com} for collection editors}
% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ed-au}, synonomous with
%    \texttt{ed-rev}}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Mar 18}{Bug fix: \texttt{and-com-ed} used correctly}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editor for later processing;
%    trap empty editor list}
% When editors are used in place of authors to identify the work, the
% names are always formatted just like authors'. However, in collections,
% where ``edited by'' or ``\emph{names} (editors)'' are given, it is
% normal not to reverse the names, even if the authors' are. The option
% \texttt{ed-rev} sees to it that editor names are always formatted exactly
% like those of authors, being reversed if necessary.
%
% The option \texttt{ed-au} is identical to \texttt{ed-rev}, but is more
% logical. It means editors (in incollections) are formatted exactly like
% authors, with all the font, reversing, and number limitations. This is
% selected automatically with \texttt{nm-init} and \texttt{nm-} default to save
% programming memory.
%
% The option \texttt{nm-revf} in this case acts the same as the default
% when no \texttt{nm-} option given: full names with surname last. Therefore
% it is not necessary to test for it at all, since it, like the default,
% has the lowest priority: any other \texttt{nm-} option clobbers it.
%
% The options \texttt{aunm-semi} and \texttt{aunm-sl} will put a semi-colon or
% slash between editor names, just as for authors, when \texttt{ed-rev} not
% selected, in keeping with the idea that in this case both authors and editors
% are to be formatted the same.
%
% This function either dispatches to \texttt{format.names} or executes code
% which is similar. In the latter case, names are always presented first
% followed by surname (``last name''); name limit processing (\texttt{nmlm}) is not executed;
% and endgame processing differs in being qualified by \texttt{nmfted}.
%
% Stack note: if the names (second) argument is a non-nil list, this function returns
% with one object on the stack, the formatted list of names.
%
% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
{
%<ed-rev|ed-au>  format.names
%<*!ed-rev&!ed-au>
  'bibinfo :=
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
  's :=
  "" 't :=
  #1 'nameptr :=
  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
  numnames 'namesleft :=
    { namesleft #0 > }
    { s nameptr
%    \end{macrocode}
% Editor name is handled as a single object, with no separation of first and last name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
%<nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>      "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
%<nm-revv1>      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-revv1>
%<nm-rv>      "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rv>
%<nm-rvx>      "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvx>
%<nm-rvcx>      "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvcx>
%<nm-rvv|nm-rvvc>      "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%</!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
%</!nm-rvcx>
%</!nm-rvx>
%</!nm-rv>
%</!nm-revv1>
%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
      format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>      remove.dots
%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm>    bib.name.font
%</!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Editor first and last name handled separately.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>
      "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
      if$
      s nameptr
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
      s nameptr
      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>
%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
%<*nm-revv1>
      "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
      if$
      s nameptr
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
      s nameptr
      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-revv1>
%<*!nm-revv1>
%<*nm-rv>
      "{f{~}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
      if$
      s nameptr
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
      s nameptr
      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-rv>
%<*!nm-rv>
%<*nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>
      "{f{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
      if$
      s nameptr
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
      s nameptr
      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>
%<*!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>
%<*nm-rvv>
      "{f{.}.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
      if$
      s nameptr
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
      s nameptr
      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
      if$
%</nm-rvv>
%<*!nm-rvv>
      "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
      if$
      s nameptr
      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
      s nameptr
      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
      if$
%</!nm-rvv>
%</!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>
%</!nm-rv>
%</!nm-revv1>
%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
      *
%</(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
      bibinfo bibinfo.check
      't :=
      nameptr #1 >
        {
          namesleft #1 >
%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>            { ", " * t * }
%<aunm-semi>            { "; " * t * }
%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>            { "/ " * t * }
            {
              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
                { 't := }
                { pop$ }
              if$
%<(and-com-ed|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>              "," *
%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-semi>              ";" *
%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>              "/" *
%<*!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand>
              numnames #2 >
%<etal-xc>              t "others" = not and
%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>                { "," * }
%<aunm-semi>                { ";" * }
%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>                { "/" * }
                'skip$
              if$
%</!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand>
              t "others" =
                {

%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  bib.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font *
%<!(nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it>                  " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  bib.name.font
                }
%<*!xand>
                {
%<*!harnm>
%<!amper>                  bbl.and
%<amper>                  "\&"
%</!harnm>
%<harnm>                  "\harvardand{}"
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>                  bib.name.font
                  space.word * t *
                }
%</!xand>
%<xand>                { " " * t * }
              if$
            }
          if$
        }
        't
      if$
      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
    }
  while$
%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
  t "others" =
    'skip$
    { bib.name.font }
  if$
%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
  } if$
%</!ed-rev&!ed-au>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.key'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {format.key}
{ empty$
    { key field.or.null }
    { "" }
  if$
}

%</ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.authors'}
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: Add code to emit collaboration.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.authors}
{ author "author" format.names
%<*revdata>
    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
      if$
      *
    }
  if$
%</revdata>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`get.bbl.editor'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: access function for editor text entity}
% Use this function universally when accessing the ``editor'' text entity.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ }

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.editors'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editors for further processing.}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 6}{Add option \texttt{edparxc}}
% The option \texttt{edpar} puts the word `editor' in parentheses.
% In \texttt{genbst.mbs}, this occurred automatically with the option
% \texttt{ed}, to abbreviate `editor' to `ed'. In \texttt{babel.mbs},
% this was not the case, because of complications with the word functions.
% Now this possibility is added as a special option, which means there is
% some inconsistency with older \texttt{.dbj} files that called \texttt{ed}:
% the abbreviated `ed' is not put in parentheses unless \texttt{edpar} is
% also called.
%
% Note that the code here is very similar to code in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle};
% the two should be kept coordinated.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.editors}
{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
%<!edpar&!edparxc>      "," *
      " " *
      get.bbl.editor
%<bkedcap>      capitalize
%<edpar|edparc|edparxc>   "(" swap$ * ")" *
      *
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.in.editors'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: code subsumed into
%     \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}}
% See the note about the option \texttt{edpar} above.
%
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.book.pages'}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*pg-bk>
FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
{ pages "pages" bibinfo.check
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    { " " * bbl.pages * }
  if$
}
%</pg-bk>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.isbn'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate isbn for further processing}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*isbn>
FUNCTION {format.isbn}
{ isbn "isbn" bibinfo.check
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
      "ISBN " swap$ *
    }
  if$
}

%</isbn>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.issn'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate issn for further processing}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*issn>
FUNCTION {format.issn}
{ issn "issn" bibinfo.check
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
      "ISSN " swap$ *
    }
  if$
}

%</issn>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.doi'}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add function}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*doi>
FUNCTION {format.doi}
{ doi "doi" bibinfo.check
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
%<!html>      "\doi{" swap$ * "}" *
%<html>      "doi:" swap$ *
    }
  if$
}
%</doi>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`select.language'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function}
% The \texttt{language} field code has been provided by Bernd Feige, of the
% University of Freiburg.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*lang>
FUNCTION {select.language}
{ duplicate$ empty$
    'pop$
    { language empty$
        'skip$
        { "{\selectlanguage{" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
      if$
    }
    if$
}

%</lang>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.note'}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Apr 25}{Add macro}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 May 26}{Fix so unmatched brace warning suppressed}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add option \texttt{url-nt}}
% Notes should be entered as though they were a sentence on their own.
% However, if they appear mid-sentence rather than after a block or sentence,
% the first letter must be lowercase. Thus if a note begins with a proper
% noun, it must be in braces. To avoid a warning about unmatched braces
% with the \texttt{change.case\$} function, check first if the leading
% character is an opening brace.
%
% With options \texttt{url,url-nt}, the URL text is treated as a note, and
% added here. It is output directly, not prepended to the note text. This
% means, if the note is to be a new sentence, the URL text starts that
% sentence, and the regular note is added to that sentence, comma between.
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate note for further processing}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Sep 14}{PWD: remove url with \texttt{revdata}}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.note}
{
%<*url-nt&!revdata>
  url empty$
    'skip$
%<!html>    { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * output }
%<html>    { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
%<html>      * ">" * url * "</a>" * output }
  if$
%</url-nt&!revdata>
 note empty$
    { "" }
    { note #1 #1 substring$
      duplicate$ "{" =
        'skip$
        { output.state mid.sentence =
          { "l" }
          { "u" }
        if$
        change.case$
        }
      if$
      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
    }
  if$
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.title'}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Add enquote function to put titles in quotes,
%    such that punctuation is inside quotes.}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Apr 17}{Fix bug in quoted title and \texttt{blk-com}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add \texttt{qx} option, for comma outside
%        quotes}
% For a quoted title, any punctuation in the title goes inside the quote.
% Otherwise, the comma or period following the title also goes inside.
% Exception is with \texttt{qx} option, in which case the comma goes
% outside, even when punctuation present; for period (\texttt{!blk-com})
% is added outside only when punctuation is absent.
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.title}
{ title
%<*!atit-u>
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    { "t" change.case$ }
  if$
%</!atit-u>
  "title" bibinfo.check
%<*tit-it|tit-qq|lang>
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
%<tit-it>      emphasize
%<*!tit-it&tit-qq>
      "\enquote{" swap$ *
%<*!qx>
%<*blk-com>
      non.stop
%<!com-semi&!com-blank>        { ",} " * }
%<com-semi>        { ";} " * }
%<!com-semi&com-blank>        { "} " * }
        { "} " * }
      if$
%</blk-com>
%<!blk-com>      add.period$ "}" *
%</!qx>
%<*qx>
%<*blk-com>
%<!com-semi&!com-blank>      "}, " *
%<com-semi>      "}; " *
%<!com-semi&com-blank>      "} " *
%</blk-com>
%<!blk-com>      "}" *
%</qx>
%</!tit-it&tit-qq>
%<lang>      select.language
    }
  if$
%</tit-it|tit-qq|lang>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.title'}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add macro to finish off quoted titles}
% For a quoted title, the punctuation appears in the quotes. For commas
% between block, this means the inter-block punctuation is already present,
% so it must be suppressed after every \texttt{format.title output}. This
% is done by setting the \texttt{output.state} to \texttt{before.all}, but
% only if there really was a title. Call this macro every time after
% titles are output.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*blk-com&tit-qq>
FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
{ title empty$
    'skip$
    { before.all 'output.state := }
  if$
}
%</blk-com&tit-qq>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.btitle'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function}
% Similar to |end.quote.title| except that it is only applied if titles of
% proceedings and collections are quoted, and if
% neither \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, nor \texttt{edby-par} are selected
% (this is the default case in the relevant menu of the \texttt{makebst.tex} run).
% These options add text after the booktitle,
% so additional punctuation need not be suppressed. Unless there is no editor!
%
% Note: this function is called after the result of \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}
% has been output, and attempts to predict what that output had been.
% Would it not be better to call this function while that result is still
% on the stack?
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*bt-qq>
FUNCTION {end.quote.btitle}
{ booktitle empty$
    'skip$
%<!edby&!edby-par&!edby-parc>    { before.all 'output.state := }
%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
    { editor empty$
        { before.all 'output.state := }
        'skip$
      if$
    }
%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
  if$
}
%</bt-qq>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`make.full.names'}
% \changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Add key labels to \texttt{calc.long.label} and
%     get {\tt'author} and {\tt'editor} in right order when author
%     missing.}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Remove \texttt{calc.long.label} and
%     \texttt{format.long.lab.names}, replacing them with
%     \texttt{format.full.names}, \texttt{make.full.names}, and adding
%     \texttt{author.editor.key}, \texttt{author.key}, and \texttt{editor.key}}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Remove option \texttt{and-com} from
%     \texttt{make.full.names}}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Add full names for \texttt{natbib} v5.3}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Suppress `and' in full list if suppressed in short}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Font of `and' in lists same as in citations}
% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Fix location of \texttt{and-xcom} code}
% In versions before 2.2, there were two functions \texttt{calc.long.label}
% and \texttt{format.long.lab.names} that made up the string
% \texttt{long.label} for each entry. This contains the full author list.
% However, there was a bug in the one routine, entered by mistake when an
% earlier bug was removed, and more seriously, the string
% \texttt{long.label} was limited to \texttt{entry.max\$} characters, 100 on
% my system. Author lists were truncated.  Thus, \texttt{make.full.names}
% is used instead to enter the full list of names directly in the
% \texttt{output.bibitem} function, without an intermediate string. This
% involves changing the order of some function definitions, especially
% \texttt{output.bibitem} must come later.
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others''
%         from last format function}
% \changes{3.98}{1999 May 28}{Fix bug with \texttt{harnm}, missing brace}
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{Format juniors to be same as for \texttt{format.lab.names}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*har|cay|nat>
FUNCTION {format.full.names}
{'s :=
 "" 't :=
  #1 'nameptr :=
  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
  numnames 'namesleft :=
    { namesleft #0 > }
    { s nameptr
%<!jnrlab>      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<*jnrlab>
%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>      "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
%</jnrlab>
%<lab&and-rm>      cite.name.font
      't :=
      nameptr #1 >
        {
%<*nmlm>
%<m1>          nameptr #1
%<m2>          nameptr #2
%<m3>          nameptr #3
%<m4>          nameptr #4
%<m5>          nameptr #5
%<m6>          nameptr #6
%<m7>          nameptr #7
%<m8>          nameptr #8
%<m9>          nameptr #9
%<m0>          nameptr #0
%<m10>          #10 +
%<m20>          #20 +
%<m30>          #30 +
%<m40>          #40 +
%<m50>          #50 +
%<m60>          #60 +
%<m70>          #70 +
%<m80>          #80 +
%<m90>          #90 +
          #1 + =
%<x1>          numnames #1
%<x2>          numnames #2
%<x3>          numnames #3
%<x4>          numnames #4
%<x5>          numnames #5
%<x6>          numnames #6
%<x7>          numnames #7
%<x8>          numnames #8
%<x9>          numnames #9
%<x0>          numnames #0
%<x10>          #10 +
%<x20>          #20 +
%<x30>          #30 +
%<x40>          #40 +
%<x50>          #50 +
%<x60>          #60 +
%<x70>          #70 +
%<x80>          #80 +
%<x90>          #90 +
          > and
            { "others" 't :=
              #1 'namesleft := }
            'skip$
          if$
%</nmlm>
          namesleft #1 >
            { ", " * t * }
            {
              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
                { 't := }
                { pop$ }
              if$
              t "others" =
                {
%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  cite.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it>                  " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  cite.name.font
                }
                {
%<*!harnm>
%<*!and-xcom>
                  numnames #2 >
                    { "," * }
                    'skip$
                  if$
%</!and-xcom>
%<!amper>                  bbl.and
%<amper>                  "\&"
%</!harnm>
%<harnm>                  "\harvardand{}"
                  space.word * t *
                }
              if$
            }
          if$
        }
        't
      if$
      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
    }
  while$
%<*lab&!and-rm>
  t "others" =
    'skip$
    { cite.name.font }
  if$
%</lab&!and-rm>
}

FUNCTION {author.editor.key.full}
{ author empty$
    { editor empty$
        { key empty$
            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
            'key
          if$
        }
        { editor format.full.names }
      if$
    }
    { author format.full.names }
  if$
}

FUNCTION {author.key.full}
{ author empty$
    { key empty$
         { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
          'key
      if$
    }
    { author format.full.names }
  if$
}

FUNCTION {editor.key.full}
{ editor empty$
    { key empty$
         { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
          'key
      if$
    }
    { editor format.full.names }
  if$
}

FUNCTION {make.full.names}
{ type$ "book" =
  type$ "inbook" =
  or
    'author.editor.key.full
    { type$ "proceedings" =
        'editor.key.full
        'author.key.full
      if$
    }
  if$
}

%</har|cay|nat>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`output.bibitem'}
%\changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Test for missing year, set to {\tt????}.}
% The \texttt{output.bibitem} function formats the |\bibitem| entries.
%\changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Move to later location, add
%   \texttt{make.full.names} instead of inserting string \texttt{long.label}}
%\changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{nat} for full author list
%  for \texttt{natbib.sty} version~5.3}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 18}{For \texttt{nat}, put label in braces}
% A user has pointed out to me that if the label argument in square brackets
% are put into braces (within the squares) it is then resistent to any
% problems if square braces should appear within the label. Do this, but
% only for the \texttt{nat} option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
{ newline$
%<*!html>
%<*ay>
%<!har&!nat>  "\bibitem[" write$
%<!har&nat>  "\bibitem[{" write$
%<har>  "\harvarditem" write$
%<nmd>  "\protect\citeauthoryear{" write$
%<ast>  "\protect\astroncite{" write$
%<cay>  "\protect\citeauthoryear{" make.full.names * "}{" * write$
%<cn>  "\protect\citename{" write$
%<!har>  label write$
%<har>  make.full.names duplicate$ label =
%<har>    'skip$
%<har>    { "[" label * "]" * write$ }
%<har>  if$
%<har>  "{" swap$ * "}{" * write$
%<har>  year duplicate$ empty$
%<cn>  ", }" year duplicate$ empty$
%<cay|nmd|ast>  "}{" year duplicate$ empty$
%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&blkyear>    { pop$ "" }
%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&!blkyear>    { pop$ "????" }
%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast>    'skip$
%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast>  if$
%<har>  extra.label * "}{" * write$
%<cn>  * extra.label * "]{" * write$
%<cay|nmd|ast>  * extra.label * "}]{" * write$
%<alk>  "]{" write$
%<!(har|cay|nmd|ast|alk|cn|nat)>  ")]{" write$
%<nat>  ")" make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
%<nat>     { pop$ }
%<nat>     { * }
%<nat>   if$
%<nat>  "}]{" * write$
%</ay>
%<!ay&!(cite|alph)>  "\bibitem{" write$
%<!ay&(cite|alph)>  "\bibitem[" label * "]{" * write$
  cite$ write$
  "}" write$
  newline$
  ""
%</!html>
%<*html>
%<*htdes>
  "<dt><strong><tt>" write$
  cite$ write$
  "</tt></strong></dt>" write$ newline$
  "<dd>"
%</htdes>
%<htlist&!htdes>  "<li>"
%<!htlist&!htdes>  "<p>"
%</html>
  before.all 'output.state :=
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`if.digit'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro}
% Add \texttt{if.digit} and \texttt{n.separate} to convert large page numbers
% to a separated number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>
FUNCTION {if.digit}
{ duplicate$ "0" =
  swap$ duplicate$ "1" =
  swap$ duplicate$ "2" =
  swap$ duplicate$ "3" =
  swap$ duplicate$ "4" =
  swap$ duplicate$ "5" =
  swap$ duplicate$ "6" =
  swap$ duplicate$ "7" =
  swap$ duplicate$ "8" =
  swap$ "9" = or or or or or or or or or
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`n.separate'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro for options \texttt{pgsep-c},
%  \texttt{pgsep-s}, \texttt{pgsep-p}}
% Large page numbers are to be separated in threes, with thin space, comma
% or period. The number must be 5 digits before the separation occurs.
% No provision is made for numbers of 7 or more digits.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {n.separate}
{ 't :=
  ""
  #0 'numnames :=
  { t empty$ not }
  { t #-1 #1 substring$ if.digit
      { numnames #1 + 'numnames := }
      { #0 'numnames := }
    if$
    t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ *
    t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
    numnames #5 =
      { duplicate$ #1 #2 substring$ swap$
        #3 global.max$ substring$
%<pgsep-c>        "," swap$ * *
%<pgsep-p>        "." swap$ * *
%<pgsep-s&!html>        "\," swap$ * *
%<pgsep-s&html>        " " swap$ * *
      }
      'skip$
    if$
  }
  while$
}
%</pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`n.dashify'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {n.dashify}
{
%<pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>  n.separate
  't :=
  ""
    { t empty$ not }
    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
            { "--" *
              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
            }
            {   { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
                { "-" *
                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
                }
              while$
            }
          if$
        }
        { t #1 #1 substring$ *
          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
        }
      if$
    }
  while$
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`word.in'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Function \texttt{word.in} constructed out of
%        \texttt{bbl.in} or \texttt{bbl.iin}.}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 16}{Use only \texttt{bbl.in} and capitalize it
%         as necessary; remove \texttt{bbl.iin}}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add option \texttt{in-x} to suppress `in'}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Add option \texttt{in-it} to italicize `in'}
% The function \texttt{word.in} prints the word \textsl{in} for references
% that are
% contained in a larger work, or in conference proceedings. One may have a
% colon after the word with the option \texttt{in-col}. If blocks of text are
% to be separated with commas (option \texttt{blk-com}) then the word remains
% in lower case, as it is defined in \texttt{bbl.in}; but if blocks act as
% sentences, then it must be capitalized.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {word.in}
%<in-x>{ "" }
%<*!in-x>
%<blk-com|blk-tita>{ bbl.in
%<!blk-com&!blk-tita>{ bbl.in capitalize
%<in-col>  ":" *
%<in-it>  emphasize
  " " * }
%</!in-x>

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.date'}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{yr-per} to put period
%    before date}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} bracket names to year
%    with new option \texttt{harnm}}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add \texttt{yr-blk} for no punctuation before
%    the date}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{dtrev} option for year month}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{mth-bare} for dotless abbreviation
%    of months}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add \texttt{volp-dt} for date after volume}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Add brace pair after
%      \texttt{\char`\\harvardyearright}}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 16}{Add \texttt{aymth} option for months in dates}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add \texttt{vnum-dt} option}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 12}{Add \texttt{yr-com} option}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 12}{Fix bug that left off extra label for plain year}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{vnum-dt} with \texttt{jdt-vs}}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add \texttt{jdt-v}}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 10}{Do \texttt{yr-blk} right}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Add \texttt{jdt-pc} to add comma after year}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{xmth} to suppress month for numericals}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{For \texttt{harnm}, suppress punctuation before date}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{blkyear} option}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the date for further processing}
% The new \texttt{harvard.sty} allows variable brackets around the date
% in the reference list. It uses |\harvardyearleft| and |\harvardyearright|
% in the \texttt{.bst} files. Allow this with the option \texttt{harnm},
% which could actually be used without the \texttt{har} option. Note that
% this overrides the other year formatting options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {format.date}
{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
    {
%<*!blkyear>
      "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
       pop$ "????"
%</!blkyear>
    }
    'skip$
  if$
%<*aymth>
  month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
    'skip$
    {
%<dtrev>      swap$
      " " * swap$
    }
  if$
  *
%<mth-bare>  remove.dots
%</aymth>
%<dtbf>  bolden
  extra.label *
%<*!harnm>
%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per>
  before.all 'output.state :=
%<yr-par>  " (" swap$ * ")" *
%<!yr-par&yr-brk>  " [" swap$ * "]" *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col>  ": " swap$ *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com>  ", " swap$ *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per>  after.sentence 'output.state :=
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk>  " " swap$ *
%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per>
%</!harnm>
%<harnm>  before.all 'output.state :=
%<harnm>  " \harvardyearleft " swap$ * "\harvardyearright{}" *
}
%</ay>
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {format.date}
{
%<!xmth>  month "month" bibinfo.check
%<xmth>  ""
  duplicate$ empty$
  year  "year"  bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
    { swap$ 'skip$
        { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ }
      if$
      *
    }
    { swap$ 'skip$
        {
%<showstack> month year
%<!dtrev>          swap$
          " " * swap$
        }
      if$
      *
%<mth-bare>      remove.dots
    }
  if$
%<dtbf>  bolden
%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk>
  duplicate$ empty$
    'skip$
    {
      before.all 'output.state :=
%<yr-par>    " (" swap$ * ")" *
%<!yr-par&yr-brk>    " [" swap$ * "]" *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col>    ": " swap$ *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com>    ", " swap$ *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per>    after.sentence 'output.state :=
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk>    " " swap$ *
    }
  if$
%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk>
}
%</!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.year'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add function}
% For the options that put the year into the journal specifications, use a
% special formatter separate from the regular date formatter.
% The year is always in parentheses (except for appended to journal name).
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate year for further processing}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs>
FUNCTION{format.year}
{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
    {  "empty year in " cite$ *
%<ay&!blkyear>       "; set to ????" *
       warning$
%<ay&!blkyear>       pop$ "????"
    }
    {
%<!ay&jdt-vs>  " (" swap$ * ")" *
%<!ay&!jdt-vs>  "(" swap$ * ")" *
    }
  if$
%<*ay>
  extra.label *
%<jdt-vs>  " (" swap$ * ")" *
%<!jdt-vs>  "(" swap$ * ")" *
%</ay>
}
%</jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.btitle'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.btitle}
{ title "title" bibinfo.check
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
%<!btit-rm>      emphasize
%<lang>      select.language
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`either.or.check'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {either.or.check}
{ empty$
    'pop$
    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.bvolume'}
% \changes{4.11}{2003 Jun 23}{Add \texttt{ser-vol}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
{ volume empty$
    { "" }
    { bbl.volume volume tie.or.space.prefix
      "volume" bibinfo.check * *
      series "series" bibinfo.check
      duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
%<*!ser-vol>
        { swap$ bbl.of space.word * swap$
          emphasize * }
%</!ser-vol>
%<ser-vol>        { emphasize ", " * swap$ * }
      if$
      "volume and number" number either.or.check
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.number.series'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.number.series}
{ volume empty$
    { number empty$
        { series field.or.null }
%<*num-xser>
        { series empty$
            { number "number" bibinfo.check }
            { output.state mid.sentence =
                { bbl.number }
                { bbl.number capitalize }
              if$
              number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
              bbl.in space.word *
              series "series" bibinfo.check *
            }
          if$
        }
%</num-xser>
%<*!num-xser>
        { output.state mid.sentence =
            { bbl.number }
            { bbl.number capitalize }
          if$
          number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
          series empty$
            { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ }
            { bbl.in space.word *
              series "series" bibinfo.check *
            }
          if$
        }
%</!num-xser>
      if$
    }
    { "" }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`is.num'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to test for digit.}
% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions}
% This function takes the single-character string on the stack and returns
% 1 if it is a digit, else 0.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!xedn>
FUNCTION {is.num}
{ chr.to.int$
  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`extract.num'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to extract leading number from
%        a literal string.}
% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions}
% This function tests the string on the stack to see if it begins with a
% number. If so, that number is left on the stack; if the string contains
% no numbers at the start, it is left unchanged. The idea is to convert
% \textsl{1st} to \textsl{1} and leave \textsl{first} as is.
% This is used by {\tt convert.edition}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {extract.num}
{ duplicate$ 't :=
  "" 's :=
  { t empty$ not }
  { t #1 #1 substring$
    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
    duplicate$ is.num
      { s swap$ * 's := }
      { pop$ "" 't := }
    if$
  }
  while$
  s empty$
    'skip$
    { pop$ s }
  if$
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`convert.edition'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to convert \texttt{edition} entry
%      text from word to a function}
% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: change calling sequence: arg on stack}
% The function \texttt{convert.edition} takes the text in the field
% \texttt{edition} and changes it to the language-specific equivalent. As
% originally planned for \btx, this field should contain the words
% \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc. Being so explicit,
% it is not so easy to translate, nor to
% convert to \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd}, etc., if one wanted.
% This function carries out the translation, by changing
% \textsl{first} or \textsl{1} to \texttt{bbl.first}, and so
% on. The field is reduced to lower case to make it case insensitive. If no
% translation is found, then the original text in \texttt{edition} is used
% instead, as it stands. However, if the original is a number greater than
% the maximum for which text is provided, then \texttt{bbl.th} is added to
% it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {convert.edition}
{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
  s "first" = s "1" = or
    { bbl.first 't := }
    { s "second" = s "2" = or
        { bbl.second 't := }
        { s "third" = s "3" = or
            { bbl.third 't := }
            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
                { bbl.fourth 't := }
                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
%<!english&exlang>                        { s bbl.th * 't := }
%<english|!exlang>                        { s eng.ord 't := }
                        { edition 't := }
                      if$
                    }
                  if$
                }
              if$
            }
          if$
        }
      if$
    }
  if$
  t
}
%</!xedn>

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.edition'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add call to \texttt{convert.edition}}
% This function formats the text for the edition specification, such as
% ``Second edition''. It combines the edition number with the word
% \textsl{edition}.
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate edition for further processing.}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.edition}
{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
%<!xedn>      convert.edition
      output.state mid.sentence =
        { "l" }
        { "t" }
      if$ change.case$
      "edition" bibinfo.check
      " " * bbl.edition *
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { multiresult }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`multi.page.check'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
{ 't :=
  #0 'multiresult :=
    { multiresult not
      t empty$ not
      and
    }
    { t #1 #1 substring$
      duplicate$ "-" =
      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
      swap$ "+" =
      or or
        { #1 'multiresult := }
        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
      if$
    }
  while$
  multiresult
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.pages'}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 24}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-par}}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-x}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Dec 10}{Add \texttt{!ppx} test to avoid extra space}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.pages}
{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
        {
%<!bkpg-x&!ppx>          bbl.pages swap$
          n.dashify
        }
        {
%<!bkpg-x&!ppx>          bbl.page swap$
        }
      if$
%<!bkpg-x&!ppx>      tie.or.space.prefix
      "pages" bibinfo.check
%<!bkpg-x&!ppx>      * *
%<bkpg-par>     "(" swap$ * ")" *
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`first.page'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*jpg-1>
FUNCTION {first.page}
{ 't :=
  ""
    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
    }
  while$
}

%</jpg-1>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.pages'}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Remove from \texttt{format.vol.num.pages} to
%        be a separate function}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Remove option \texttt{vnum-pg}}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}}
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.}
%
% Note: this function gets called with something on the stack.
% It may be the volume and number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
        {
%<volp-sp>          ": " *
%<*!volp-sp>
%<volp-blk>          " " *
%<*!volp-blk>
%<volp-com>          ", " *
%<*!volp-com>
%<volp-semi>          "; " *
%<!volp-semi>          ":" *
%</!volp-com>
%</!volp-blk>
%</!volp-sp>
%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&jdt-p>          format.year * " " *
%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&!jdt-p&jdt-pc>          format.year * ", " *
          swap$
%<jpg-1>          first.page
%<!jpg-1>          n.dashify
%<*jwdpg>
          pages multi.page.check
            'bbl.pages
            'bbl.page
          if$
          swap$ tie.or.space.prefix
%</jwdpg>
          "pages" bibinfo.check
%<jwdpg>          * *
          *
        }
      if$
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.eid'}
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add function to emit the eid information.}
% This function is called with something on the stack (journal vol, number)
% and appends \texttt{eid} and \texttt{numpages} if those field are non-empty.
% Very similar to \texttt{format.journal.pages}.
%
% For the AGU style of including the DOI as part of the EID, the DOI number
% is appended too.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
      {
%<volp-sp>          ": " *
%<*!volp-sp>
%<volp-blk>          " " *
%<*!volp-blk>
%<volp-com>          ", " *
%<*!volp-com>
%<volp-semi>          "; " *
%<!volp-semi>          ":" *
%</!volp-com>
%</!volp-blk>
%</!volp-sp>
      }
      if$
      swap$ *
%<*revdata>
      numpages empty$ 'skip$
        { bbl.eidpp numpages tie.or.space.prefix
          "numpages" bibinfo.check * *
          " (" swap$ * ")" * *
        }
      if$
%</revdata>
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.vol.num.pages'}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{volp-sp} to put space
%    after colon in vol:~page.}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)c}{1995 Jan 20}{Add options \texttt{vnum-h},
%   \texttt{vnum-nr} and \texttt{vnum-x} for various formats of
%   journal vol number}
% \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Add options \texttt{vnum-sp} and
%     \texttt{vnum-cm}}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 17}{Add option \texttt{volp-semi}}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Put \texttt{bolden} in right place for
%    \texttt{vol-2bf} option}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Put date between volume and number}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add possibilitity of `page' word}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Activate \texttt{jwdpg} option properly}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add possibilitity of `volume' word}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add option \texttt{pp-last}}
% Version 3.84, I have rationalized several options that placed the date in the
% journal specifications. It was rather chaotic before, but now it should be
% more systematic. This means some options have been removed, something that I
% do not like to do.
%
% The option \texttt{pp-last} suppresses the pages in the formatting macros, and
% sees to it that the pages are added just before any notes in those entries
% that take pages. This applies to more than just \texttt{article}, but to
% \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection} as well.
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the volume and number for
%   further processing.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages}
{ volume field.or.null
  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
%<jwdvol>      bbl.volume swap$ tie.or.space.prefix
      "volume" bibinfo.check
%<jwdvol>      * *
    }
  if$
%<vol-bf&!vol-2bf>  bolden
%<!vol-bf&!vol-2bf&vol-it>  emphasize
%<jdt-v|jdt-vs>  format.year *
%<*!vnum-x>
  number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
      swap$ duplicate$ empty$
        { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ }
        'skip$
      if$
      swap$
%<vnum-sp>      "~(" swap$ * ")" *
%<!vnum-sp&vnum-cm>      ", " swap$ *
%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&vnum-nr>      ", " bbl.nr * number tie.or.space.prefix pop$ * swap$ *
%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&vnum-h>      ", \#" swap$ *
%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&vnum-b>      " " swap$ *
%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&!vnum-b>      "(" swap$ * ")" *
    }
  if$ *
%<!vol-bf&vol-2bf>  bolden
%</!vnum-x>
%<*!pp-last>
  eid empty$
    { format.journal.pages }
    { format.journal.eid }
  if$
%</!pp-last>
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.chapter.pages'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate series and chapter for
%   further processing.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
{ chapter empty$
%<!pp-last>    'format.pages
%<pp-last>    { "" }
    { type empty$
        { bbl.chapter }
        { type "l" change.case$
          "type" bibinfo.check
        }
      if$
      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
      "chapter" bibinfo.check
      * *
%<*!pp-last>
      pages empty$
        'skip$
        { ", " * format.pages * }
      if$
%</!pp-last>
    }
  if$
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bt.enquote'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: trap \texttt{empty\$} argument}
% This is to place the booktitle for proceedings and collections into quotes.
% If punctuation is to be included, then add a comma unless a stop already
% exists, or add a period under the only circumstances that
% |format.in.ed.booktitle| is followed by |new.sentence|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*bt-qq>
FUNCTION {bt.enquote}
{ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
  { "\enquote{" swap$ *
%<*!qx>
    non.stop
      { ",} " * }
      { "}, " * }
    if$
%</!qx>
%<*qx>
    "}, " *
%</qx>
  }
  if$
}
%</bt-qq>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.booktitle'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: new function}
% The function \texttt{format.booktitle} pushes one object
% (the book title, suitably encapsulated) onto the stack.
% It is currently used in \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
% and in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}, and should be used whenever accessing
% the \texttt{booktitle} field for eventual output.
%
% If the book title is empty or missing, the function pushes an empty string.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
{
  booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check
%<!bt-qq&!bt-rm>  emphasize
%<bt-qq>  bt.enquote
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.in.ed.booktitle'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{edby-par} to put editors
%   in parentheses}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{If \texttt{ed} and \texttt{edby} given
%   together, abbreviate `edited by' to `ed(s).'}
% \changes{3.1}{1995 May 2}{Add option \texttt{edbyx} to replace `edited by'
%    by `ed(s).'}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{edcap}}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 10}{Fix bug that added extra space sometimes}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Book titles may also be roman}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{New options \texttt{edby-parc} and \texttt{edbyw}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: rewritten; encapsulates \texttt{booktitle} and
%      \texttt{editor} for later processing}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Sept 17}{PWD: fix up several bugs}
% Prior to version 3.81, the \textsl{Editor} or \textsl{Edited by} in
% parentheses was meant to be capitalized, but this did not work properly.
% Now the option \texttt{edcap} produces this, and default is not capitalized.
%
% Notes on \dtx{} options:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item
% The following combinations are available through the \texttt{makebst.tex} interface:
% \begin{verbatim}
% (
%  <default>
%  |edby     (      |edbyx       |edbyy|edbyw[edcap])
%  |edby-par (|edcap|edbyx[edcap]|edbyy             )
%  |edby-parc(|edcap|edbyx                          )
% )
% \end{verbatim}
% \item
% \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, and \texttt{edby-parc} are mutually exclusive
% and, except for the default, exhaustive.
% \item
% \texttt{edbyx}, \texttt{edbyw}, and \texttt{edbyy} are mutually exclusive
% and, except for the default, exhaustive.
% \item
% \texttt{edcap} is independent of the above two groups of options.
% \item
% When parentheses need to be applied, we make sure that the respective
% \dtx{} guard expressions are mutually exclusive.
% It makes no sense for \texttt{edbyw} to be in effect if either of
% \texttt{edby-par} or \texttt{edby-parc} is in effect.
% \item
% \texttt{makebst.tex} only activates \texttt{edcap} in certain cases,
% but we do no checking here, applying it consistently to the
% ``editor'' text entity.
% \item
% The code between \texttt{<!edpar>} and \verb+<edpar\|edparc>+
% \emph{must} match the corresponding code in \texttt{format.editors}.
% This means that in the default case, formatting is controlled by
% a \dtx{} mechanism entirely different from the other cases.
% \item \texttt{ser-ed} has been added to suit AGU. Result of series plus
% volume to go between booktitle and editors; must remove \texttt{format.bvolume}
% from \texttt{incollection} and \texttt{inproceedings}.
% \end{itemize}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
{ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
    {
%<showstack>% btitle
%<*ser-ed>
      format.bvolume duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
        { ", " swap$ * * }
      if$
%</ser-ed>
      editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
        {
%<*!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)>
%<showstack>% btitle ednms
%<!edpar&!edparxc>          "," *
          " " *
          get.bbl.editor
%<bkedcap>          capitalize
%<edpar>          "(" swap$ * "), " *
%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)>          "(" swap$ * ") " *
%<!edpar&!(edparc|edparxc)>          ", " *
          * swap$
%<showstack>% eds btitle
%</!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)>
%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
%<showstack>% btitle ednms
%<edbyx|edbyy|edbyw>          get.bbl.editor
%<!(edbyx|edbyy|edbyw)>          bbl.edby
%<edcap>          capitalize
%<!(edby-par|edby-parc)&edbyw>          "(" swap$ * ")" *
%<showstack>% btitle ednms ed
%<(edby-par|edby)&edbyy>          swap$ "," *
          " " * swap$ *
%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed
%<(edby-par|edby-parc)&!edbyw>          "(" swap$ * ")" *
          swap$
%<edby|edby-parc>          "," *
          " " * swap$
%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed (or ednms-ed btitle)
          * }
      if$
%<showstack>% btitle-ednms-ed (or ednms-ed-btitle) (or btitle)
      word.in swap$ *
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`empty.misc.check'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {empty.misc.check}
{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$
  month empty$ year empty$ note empty$
  and and and and and
%<!seq-no|alph>  key empty$ not and
    { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ }
    'skip$
  if$
}
%</!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.thesis.type'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
{ type duplicate$ empty$
    'pop$
    { swap$ pop$
      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.tr.number'}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Encapsulate number}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
{ number "number" bibinfo.check
  type duplicate$ empty$
    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
    'skip$
  if$
  "type" bibinfo.check
  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.article.crossref'}
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{journal} with
%   \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate journal for further processing.}
% The \texttt{journal} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
% done by command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
{
%<*!ay>
  key duplicate$ empty$
    { pop$
      journal duplicate$ empty$
        { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ }
        { "journal" bibinfo.check emphasize word.in swap$ * }
      if$
    }
    { word.in swap$ * " " *}
  if$
%</!ay>
%<ay>  word.in
%<!html>  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
%<html>  " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.crossref.editor'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: editor encapsulated for later processing}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: fixed typo: "etal_rm"->"etal-rm"}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor}
{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm>  bib.name.font
  "editor" bibinfo.check
  editor num.names$ duplicate$
  #2 >
    { pop$
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>      bib.name.font
      "editor" bibinfo.check
      " " * bbl.etal
%<etal-it>      emphasize
      *
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>      bib.name.font
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>      "others" 't :=
    }
    { #2 <
        'skip$
        { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
            {
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>              bib.name.font
              "editor" bibinfo.check
              " " * bbl.etal
%<etal-it>              emphasize
              *
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>              bib.name.font
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>              "others" 't :=
            }
            {
%<*!harnm>
%<!amper>             bbl.and space.word
%<amper>              " \& "
%</!harnm>
%<harnm>              " \harvardand\ "
              * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm>              bib.name.font
              "editor" bibinfo.check
              *
            }
          if$
        }
      if$
    }
  if$
%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm>
  t "others" =
    'skip$
    { bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check }
  if$
%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm>
}
%</!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.book.crossref'}
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{series} with
%   \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate volume and series for
%    further processing.}
% The \texttt{series} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
% done by command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
{ volume duplicate$ empty$
    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
      pop$ word.in
    }
    { bbl.volume
%<!(blk-com|blk-tita)>      capitalize
      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
    }
  if$
%<*!ay>
  editor empty$
  editor field.or.null author field.or.null =
  or
    { key empty$
        { series empty$
            { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " *
              crossref * warning$
              "" *
            }
            { series emphasize * }
          if$
        }
        { key * }
      if$
    }
    { format.crossref.editor * }
  if$
%</!ay>
%<!html>  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
%<html>  " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.incoll.inproc.crossref'}
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{booktitle} with
%     \texttt{emphasize},  not explicitly}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.booktitle}}
% The \texttt{booktitle} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
% done by command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
{
%<*!ay>
  editor empty$
  editor field.or.null author field.or.null =
  or
    { key empty$
        { format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$
            { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " *
              crossref * warning$
            }
            { word.in swap$ * }
          if$
        }
        { word.in key * " " *}
      if$
    }
    { word.in format.crossref.editor * " " *}
  if$
%</!ay>
%<ay>  word.in
%<!html>  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
%<html>  " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.org.or.pub'}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Add option \texttt{add-pub} which makes use
%    of this function}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Add option \texttt{pub-par} to put publisher
%    in parentheses}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{pub-date} to put publisher
%    and date in parentheses together}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add \texttt{add.blank} for \texttt{pub-par}}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add extra label with \texttt{pub-date}}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Option \texttt{pub-nopar} to suppress parentheses
%   with \texttt{pub-date}}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Change to include organization if present}
% \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Include \texttt{dtbf} option with \texttt{pub-date}}
% Psychology journals often want \textit{address}: \textit{publisher}.
%
% \textsl{Nature} wants publisher and date in parentheses, and when both
% are there, they are merged into one set.
%
% Call function \texttt{add.blank} before parentheses so suppress preceding
% punctuation, which looks strange when publisher in parentheses.
%
% MPG Jahrbuch wants publisher and year, but without parentheses. Add
% \texttt{pub-nopar} to be used with \texttt{pub-date}.
%
% Have now (3.87.h) extended this function to include the organization, if
% present. This is for \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings} where
% the publisher is optional, and organization too. If the publisher is missing,
% but the organization present, it is formatted like the publisher. This
% complication comes from styles that want the publisher/organization to have
% the date included, all in parentheses.
%
% This function is called by \texttt{format.publisher.address} and
% \texttt{format.organization.address}, each putting the appropriate text
% into the stack first.
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate address and year for
%    further processing.}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
{ 't :=
  ""
%<*pub-date&!ay>
  year empty$
    { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ }
    'skip$
  if$
%</pub-date&!ay>
%<*!(pub-date&ay)>
  address empty$ t empty$ and
%<pub-date>  year empty$ and
    'skip$
    {
%</!(pub-date&ay)>
%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)>      add.blank "(" *
%<*add-pub>
      address "address" bibinfo.check *
      t empty$
        'skip$
%</add-pub>
%<*!add-pub>
      t empty$
        { address "address" bibinfo.check *
        }
        { t *
          address empty$
            'skip$
            { ", " * address "address" bibinfo.check * }
          if$
        }
%</!add-pub>
%<*add-pub>
        { address empty$
            'skip$
            { ": " * }
          if$
          t *
        }
%</add-pub>
      if$
%<*pub-date&!ay>
      year empty$
        'skip$
        { t empty$ address empty$ and
            'skip$
            { ", " * }
          if$
          year "year" bibinfo.check
%<dtbf>          bolden
          *
        }
      if$
%</pub-date&!ay>
%<*pub-date&ay>
      year duplicate$ empty$
%<*!blkyear>
        { "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
           pop$ "????" }
%</!blkyear>
%<*blkyear>
        { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$
           pop$ "" }
%</blkyear>
%<!dtbf>        { "year" bibinfo.check extra.label * }
%<dtbf>        { "year" bibinfo.check bolden extra.label * }
      if$
      t empty$ address empty$ and
        { * }
%<!pub-xc>        { ", " swap$ * * }
%<pub-xc>        { " " swap$ * * }
      if$
%</pub-date&ay>
%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)>      ")" *
%<*!(pub-date&ay)>
    }
  if$
%</!(pub-date&ay)>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.publisher.address'}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate \texttt{publisher}
%    and \texttt{organization}}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 28}{Check with \texttt{bibinfo.warn}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.organization.address'}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`name.or.dash'}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add function to replace repeated names by dash}
% \changes{4.06}{2003 Apr 2}{Add double and triple dashes}
% This function stores what is on the stack, compares it with previous value,
% and replaces it with a long dash if they are equal. What is on the stack
% should be author or editor names for the current entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*nmdash>
STRINGS {oldname}

FUNCTION {name.or.dash}
{ 's :=
   oldname empty$
     { s 'oldname := s }
     { s oldname =
%<*!au-col>
%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3>         { "---" }
%<nmd-2&!nmd-3>         { "---{}---" }
%<nmd-3>         { "---{}---{}---" }
%</!au-col>
%<*au-col>
%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3>         { "---" add.blank }
%<nmd-2&!nmd-3>         { "---{}---" add.blank }
%<nmd-3>         { "---{}---{}---" add.blank }
%</au-col>
         { s 'oldname := s }
       if$
     }
   if$
}

%</nmdash>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`article'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{yrp-x} to suppress
%    punctuation following date at beginning}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 8}{Add option \texttt{yrp-col} to add colon after
%    date at beginning}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{jxper} to remove periods
%    from journal name}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add option \texttt{dt-jnl} to make date part of
%    the journal specification, follows journal name.}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add option \texttt{au-col}}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Add option \texttt{jttl-rm}}
% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Put \texttt{purify\$} before \texttt{emphasize}}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{blk-tita} for article only}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{blknt} for period before notes}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{injnl} for `in' with journal
%              names}
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.journal} and
%   \texttt{format.journal.eid}; call \texttt{format.eprint}, and
%    \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Fix bug with texttt{injnl}}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {article}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<*dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
  format.date "year" output.check
  date.block
%</dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<*!jtit-x>
  format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<*blk-tit|blk-tita>
%<!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<tit-col>  add.colon
%</blk-tit|blk-tita>
%</!jtit-x>
  crossref missing$
    {
      journal
%<jxper>      remove.dots
      "journal" bibinfo.check
%<!jttl-rm>      emphasize
%<injnl>      word.in swap$ *
      "journal" output.check
%<jnm-x>      add.blank
%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
      format.date "year" output.check
      date.block
%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
      format.vol.num.pages output
%<doi&agu-doi>  format.doi output
%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
      format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
    }
    { format.article.crossref output.nonnull
%<!pp-last>      format.pages output
    }
  if$
%<*pp-last>
  eid empty$
    { format.journal.pages }
    { format.journal.eid }
  if$
%</pp-last>
%<issn>  format.issn output
%<doi&!agu-doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<*revdata>
  format.url output
%</revdata>
  fin.entry
%<harnm|url-nl>  write.url
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`book'}
%\changes{2.0a}{1994 Aug 30}{Fix up \texttt{new.sentence} so not added with
%        \texttt{blk-com}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {book}
{ output.bibitem
  author empty$
    { format.editors "author and editor" output.check
%<ay>      editor format.key output
%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)&!au-col>      add.blank
%<au-col>      add.colon
%<nmdash>      name.or.dash
    }
    { format.authors output.nonnull
%<au-col>      add.colon
%<nmdash>      name.or.dash
      crossref missing$
        { "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
        'skip$
      if$
    }
  if$
%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.btitle "title" output.check
  crossref missing$
    { format.bvolume output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%<!numser>      format.number.series output
%<pre-edn>      format.edition output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.sentence
%<numser>      format.number.series output
%<pg-bk&pg-pre>      format.book.pages output
      format.publisher.address output
    }
    {
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
    }
  if$
%<!pre-edn>  format.edition output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
%<isbn>  format.isbn output
%<pg-bk&!pg-pre>  format.book.pages output
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`booklet'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {booklet}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors output
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<ay&dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&dt-beg>  format.date output
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
  address "address" bibinfo.check output
%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date output
%<isbn>  format.isbn output
%<pg-bk>  format.book.pages output
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date output
%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`inbook'}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Use \texttt{format.date} in place of
%     \texttt{year} alone}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% The medical journals, with option \texttt{dt-jnl}, have the date as part of
% the journal specification. For chapters in books, they want date and pages
% to appear at the end, with a space between them. (For journals, there is to be
% no space.) Suppress the chapter specification (for now).
%
% The \texttt{dt-jnl} option usually behaves as the default, except for some
% special entries, like this one.
%
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.}
% Restore the chapter specification (2004 Feb 9) after someone complained.
% There are still some bugs here. If some date punctuation is specified, say
%  with \texttt{yrp-semi} for a semi-colon after the year, this appears always,
%  even if there is no text following. But then this to be an unlikely wish anyway,
%  since such punctuation options are best suited for \texttt{dt-beg}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {inbook}
{ output.bibitem
  author empty$
    { format.editors "author and editor" output.check
%<ay>      editor format.key output
%<au-col>      add.colon
%<nmdash>      name.or.dash
    }
    { format.authors output.nonnull
%<au-col>      add.colon
%<nmdash>      name.or.dash
      crossref missing$
        { "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
        'skip$
      if$
    }
  if$
%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.btitle "title" output.check
  crossref missing$
    {
%<pre-pub&numser>      format.number.series output
%<pre-pub>      format.publisher.address output
      format.bvolume output
%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
      format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%<!numser>      format.number.series output
%<pre-edn>      format.edition output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.sentence
%<!pre-pub&numser>      format.number.series output
%<!pre-pub>      format.publisher.address output
    }
    {
%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
      format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
    }
  if$
%<!pre-edn>  format.edition output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
%<*isbn>
  crossref missing$
    { format.isbn output }
    'skip$
  if$
%</isbn>
%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
  format.date "year" output.check
  date.block
%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
%<pp-last>  format.pages "pages" output.check
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`incollection'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.}
FUNCTION {incollection}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<*!jtit-x>
  format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%</!jtit-x>
  crossref missing$
    { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
%<bt-qq>      end.quote.btitle
%<pre-pub&numser>      format.number.series output
%<pre-pub>      format.publisher.address output
%<!ser-ed>      format.bvolume output
%<!numser>      format.number.series output
%<pre-edn>      format.edition output
      format.chapter.pages output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.sentence
%<!pre-pub&numser>      format.number.series output
%<!pre-pub>      format.publisher.address output
%<!pre-edn>      format.edition output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
%<isbn>      format.isbn output
    }
    { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
      format.chapter.pages output
    }
  if$
%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
  format.date "year" output.check
  date.block
%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
%<pp-last>  format.pages "pages" output.check
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`inproceedings'}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Reorganize organization/publisher}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 5}{Fix extraneous page output without
%        \texttt{pp-last}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.05}{2002 Oct 21}{Fix bug with \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-beg}}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {inproceedings}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<*!jtit-x>
  format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%</!jtit-x>
  crossref missing$
    { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
%<bt-qq>      end.quote.btitle
%<*!pre-pub>
%<!ser-ed>      format.bvolume output
%<!numser>      format.number.series output
%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last>      format.pages output
%</!pre-pub>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.sentence
%<numser>      format.number.series output
      publisher empty$
        { format.organization.address output }
        { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
          format.publisher.address output
        }
      if$
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
%<*pre-pub>
      format.bvolume output
%<!numser>      format.number.series output
%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last>      format.pages output
%</pre-pub>
%<isbn>      format.isbn output
%<issn>      format.issn output
    }
    { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last>      format.pages output
    }
  if$
%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last>
%<!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
%<!pub-date>  date.block
%<jdt-v|jdt-vs|jdt-p|!jdt-pc>  add.blank
  format.pages "pages" output.check
%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last>
%<pp-last>  format.pages "pages" output.check
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`conference'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`manual'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {manual}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors output
  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.btitle "title" output.check
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  organization address new.block.checkb
  organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
  address "address" bibinfo.check output
  format.edition output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%</ay>
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {manual}
{ output.bibitem
  author empty$
    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check
      duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
        { output
          address "address" bibinfo.check output
        }
      if$
    }
    { format.authors output.nonnull }
  if$
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<ay&dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&dt-beg>  format.date output
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.btitle "title" output.check
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
  author empty$
    { organization empty$
        {
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>          address new.block.checka
          address "address" bibinfo.check output
        }
        'skip$
      if$
    }
    {
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      organization address new.block.checkb
      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
      address "address" bibinfo.check output
    }
  if$
  format.edition output
%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date output
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date output
%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%</!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`mastersthesis'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like
%         articles instead of books.}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call
%     \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% To format a master's thesis.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<*!thtit-x>
%<!thtit-a>  format.btitle
%<thtit-a>  format.title
  "title" output.check
%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%</!thtit-x>
  bbl.mthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull
  school "school" bibinfo.warn output
  address "address" bibinfo.check output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`misc'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {misc}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors output
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<ay&dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&dt-beg>  format.date output
%<*ay>
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.title output
%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%</ay>
%<*!ay>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  title howpublished new.block.checkb
  format.title output
%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  howpublished new.block.checka
%</!ay>
  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date output
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date output
%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
%<!ay>  empty.misc.check
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`phdthesis'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like
%         articles instead of books.}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call
%     \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% To format a doctoral thesis.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {phdthesis}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<*!thtit-x>
%<!thtit-a>  format.btitle
%<thtit-a>  format.title
  "title" output.check
%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%</!thtit-x>
  bbl.phdthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull
  school "school" bibinfo.warn output
  address "address" bibinfo.check output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`presentation'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*pres>
FUNCTION {presentation}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors output
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.title output
%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
  month "month" output.check
  year "year" output.check
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
  new.sentence
  type missing$ 'skip$
  {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
    if$
%<*url-blk&!harnm>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm>
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%</pres>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`proceedings'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \changes{4.16}{2006 Feb 15}{For numerical, the number/series could be missing when editor there; fixed}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {proceedings}
{ output.bibitem
  format.editors output
  editor format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.btitle "title" output.check
  format.bvolume output
%<!numser>  format.number.series output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.sentence
%<numser>  format.number.series output
  publisher empty$
    { format.organization.address output }
    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
      format.publisher.address output
    }
  if$
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
%<isbn>  format.isbn output
%<issn>  format.issn output
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%</ay>
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {proceedings}
{ output.bibitem
  editor empty$
    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
    }
    { format.editors output.nonnull }
  if$
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.btitle "title" output.check
  format.bvolume output
%<!numser>  format.number.series output
  editor empty$
    { publisher empty$
%<numser>        {  format.number.series output }
        {
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>          new.sentence
%<numser>          format.number.series output
          format.publisher.address output
        }
      if$
    }
    { publisher empty$
        {
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>          new.sentence
%<numser>          format.number.series output
          format.organization.address output }
        {
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>          new.sentence
%<numser>          format.number.series output
          organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
          format.publisher.address output
        }
      if$
     }
  if$
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
%<isbn>  format.isbn output
%<issn>  format.issn output
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%</!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`techreport'}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 4}{Add option \texttt{trtit-b}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{trnum-it}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: institution via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call
%  \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {techreport}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<trtit-b>  format.btitle
%<!trtit-b>  format.title
  "title" output.check
%<!trtit-b&blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
%<!trnum-it>  format.tr.number output.nonnull
%<trnum-it>  format.tr.number emphasize output.nonnull
  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output
  address "address" bibinfo.check output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`unpublished'}
% \changes{3.85}{1997 Nov 25}{Fix date at normal end}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {unpublished}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay>  author format.key output
%<au-col>  add.colon
%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
%<ay&dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&dt-beg>  format.date output
%<dt-beg>  date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date output
%<doi>  format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
  format.note "note" output.check
%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date output
%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
  format.date output
%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint>  format.eprint output
%<revdata>  format.url output
  fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`default.type'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
READ
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay|alph|!seq-no>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`sortify'}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Do not allow unsorted alphas}
% In \texttt{btxbst.doc}/\texttt{.mbs}, the \texttt{sortify} function is
% left out for unsorted alpha-style citations. This leads to an error,
% because it is still used. So leave it in here too. \emph{In fact, do away
% with unsorted alpha style, since it is as useless as unsorted author--year
% listings.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {sortify}
{ purify$
  "l" change.case$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { len }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`chop.word'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {chop.word}
{ 's :=
  'len :=
  s #1 len substring$ =
    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
    's
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay&alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.lab.names'}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add option \texttt{alph} for \texttt{alpha.bst}
%    style of labels}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 4}{Add options \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f}}
% \changes{3.85}{1997 Dec 1}{Add option \texttt{jnrlab}}
% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font}
% The function \texttt{format.lab.names} formats by author--year or the
% \texttt{alpha} style as in the original \texttt{alpha.bst}.
% Only major difference is that there should be no unsorted (\texttt{seq-no})
% versions of this. Patashnik was clearly very unhappy about accommodating
% such an animal, and in fact, his unsorted alpha style crashes \btx.
% I also provide the \texttt{vonx} option here to ignore the \textsl{von}
% part of the name.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { et.al.char.used }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used}
{ #0 'et.al.char.used :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
{ 's :=
%<*alf-1>
%<!vonx>  s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$
%<vonx>  s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$
  duplicate$ text.length$ #2 <
    { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ }
      'skip$
    if$
%</alf-1>
%<*!alf-1&alf-f>
%<!vonx>  s #1 "{vv{}}{ll}" format.name$
%<vonx>  s #1 "{ll}" format.name$
%</!alf-1&alf-f>
%<*!alf-1&!alf-f>
  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
  numnames #1 >
    { numnames #4 >
        { #3 'namesleft := }
        { numnames 'namesleft := }
      if$
      #1 'nameptr :=
      ""
        { namesleft #0 > }
        { nameptr numnames =
            { s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
                { "{\etalchar{+}}" *
                  #1 'et.al.char.used :=
                }
%<!vonx>                { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * }
%<vonx>                { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * }
              if$
            }
%<!vonx>            { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * }
%<vonx>            { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * }
          if$
          nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
          namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
        }
      while$
      numnames #4 >
        { "{\etalchar{+}}" *
          #1 'et.al.char.used :=
        }
        'skip$
      if$
    }
%<!vonx>    { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$
%<vonx>    { s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$
      duplicate$ text.length$ #2 <
        { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ }
        'skip$
      if$
    }
  if$
%</!alf-1&!alf-f>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others''
%         from last format function}
% The function for the standard citation: one or two authors cited full, but for
%  more than two, only the first with \emph{et~al.} given.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay&!mcite>
FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
{ 's :=
  "" 't :=
%<!jnrlab>  s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<*jnrlab>
%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>  s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>  s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
%</jnrlab>
%<lab&and-rm>  cite.name.font
  s num.names$ duplicate$
  #2 >
    { pop$
%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>      cite.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm>      " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm>      " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it>      " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>      cite.name.font
%<lab&!and-rm>      "others" 't :=
    }
    { #2 <
        'skip$
        { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
            {
% %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>              cite.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm>              " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm>              " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it>              " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>              cite.name.font
%<lab&!and-rm>              "others" 't :=
            }
%<*!harnm>
%<*!amper>
            { bbl.and space.word * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<lab&and-rm>              cite.name.font
              * }
%</!amper>
%<*amper>
            { " \& " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<lab&and-rm>              cite.name.font
              * }
%</amper>
%</!harnm>
%<*harnm>
            { " \harvardand{} " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<lab&and-rm>              cite.name.font
              * }
%</harnm>
          if$
        }
      if$
    }
  if$
%<*lab&!and-rm>
  t "others" =
    'skip$
    { cite.name.font }
  if$
%</lab&!and-rm>
}

%</ay&!mcite>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{Add citations with more than one author with \emph{et~al.}}
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 24}{Select number of authors before truncating}
% The code for formating author--year citations with more than one author
% before \emph{et al.} or selecting a number other than two for truncating,
% is much the same as the \texttt{format.full.names} function.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay&mcite>
FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
{'s :=
 "" 't :=
  #1 'nameptr :=
  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
  numnames 'namesleft :=
    { namesleft #0 > }
    { s nameptr
%<!jnrlab>      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<*jnrlab>
%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>      "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
%</jnrlab>
%<lab&and-rm>      cite.name.font
      't :=
      nameptr #1 >
        {
%<mct-1>          nameptr #2 =
%<mct-2>          nameptr #3 =
%<mct-3>          nameptr #4 =
%<mct-4>          nameptr #5 =
%<mct-5>          nameptr #6 =
%<mct-x2>          numnames #2 > and
%<mct-x3>          numnames #3 > and
%<mct-x4>          numnames #4 > and
%<mct-x5>          numnames #5 > and
            { "others" 't :=
              #1 'namesleft := }
            'skip$
          if$
          namesleft #1 >
            { ", " * t * }
            {
              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
                { 't := }
                { pop$ }
              if$
              t "others" =
                {
%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  cite.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it>                  " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  cite.name.font
                }
                {
%<*!harnm>
%<*!and-xcom>
                  numnames #2 >
                    { "," * }
                    'skip$
                  if$
%</!and-xcom>
%<!amper>                  bbl.and
%<amper>                  "\&"
%</!harnm>
%<harnm>                  "\harvardand{}"
                  space.word * t *
                }
              if$
            }
          if$
        }
        't
      if$
      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
    }
  while$
%<*lab&!and-rm>
  t "others" =
    'skip$
    { cite.name.font }
  if$
%</lab&!and-rm>
}

%</ay&mcite>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`author.key.label'}
% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.key.label'}
% \begin{macro}{`author.key.organization.label'}
% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.organization.label'}
% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.label'}
% Have to be very careful with the options \texttt{ay}, \texttt{alph}, and
% \texttt{seq-no} here. The first two are actually mutually exclusive, and
% \texttt{ay} should dominate. The \texttt{seq-no} option only applies for
% numerical (\texttt{!ay}) but not alphabetic (\texttt{alph}) selections.
% This whole block of coding dealing with labels is only included for
% author--year or alphabetic or ordered numerical.
% That is, \texttt{ay} or \texttt{alph} or \texttt{!seq-no} is true.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay|alph>
FUNCTION {author.key.label}
{ author empty$
    { key empty$
        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
%<ay>        'key
%<!ay>        { key #3 text.prefix$ }
      if$
    }
    { author format.lab.names }
  if$
}

FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
{ author empty$
    { editor empty$
        { key empty$
            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
%<ay>            'key
%<!ay>            { key #3 text.prefix$ }
          if$
        }
        { editor format.lab.names }
      if$
    }
    { author format.lab.names }
  if$
}

%</ay|alph>
%<*!ay&alph>
FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label}
{ author empty$
    { key empty$
        { organization empty$
            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
            { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ }
          if$
        }
        { key #3 text.prefix$ }
      if$
    }
    { author format.lab.names }
  if$
}

FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label}
{ editor empty$
    { key empty$
        { organization empty$
            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
            { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ }
          if$
        }
        { key #3 text.prefix$ }
      if$
    }
    { editor format.lab.names }
  if$
}

%</!ay&alph>
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
{ editor empty$
    { key empty$
        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
        'key
      if$
    }
    { editor format.lab.names }
  if$
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.authors'}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Add function to store short list of authors
%     for later test}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
{ type$ "book" =
  type$ "inbook" =
  or
    'author.editor.key.label
    { type$ "proceedings" =
        'editor.key.label
        'author.key.label
      if$
    }
  if$
  'short.list :=
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`calc.label'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)a}{1994 Oct 11}{Add option \texttt{note-yr}}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add options \texttt{lab-bf} and \texttt{lab-sc}}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add \texttt{calc.label} from \texttt{alpha.bst}}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{keyxyr} option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {calc.label}
{ calc.short.authors
  short.list
%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn)>  "("
%<har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn>  ", "
  *
  year duplicate$ empty$
%<keyxyr>  short.list key field.or.null = or
%<(blkyear|keyxyr)>     { pop$ "" }
%<!(blkyear|keyxyr)>     { pop$ "????" }
%<!note-yr>     { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ }
%<note-yr>     'skip$
  if$
  *
  'label :=
}

%</ay>
%<*!ay&alph>
FUNCTION {calc.label}
{ type$ "book" =
  type$ "inbook" =
  or
    'author.editor.key.label
    { type$ "proceedings" =
        'editor.key.organization.label
        { type$ "manual" =
            'author.key.organization.label
            'author.key.label
          if$
        }
      if$
    }
  if$
  duplicate$
  year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$
  *
  'label :=
  year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$
  *
  sortify 'sort.label :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*har|cay|nmd|ast|cn>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.label'}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {calc.short.label}
{ calc.short.authors short.list
  'label :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</har|cay|nmd|ast|cn>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.names'}
% \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Make ordering of `et al' works by year
%    and authors and not just year}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 16}{Add option \texttt{vonx} so sorting ignores the
%   \emph{von} part of the name}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{For limited authors, sort only on those present}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{`Et al' considered author before all others}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{`Et al' considered author after all others}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
{ 's :=
  #1 'nameptr :=
  ""
  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
  numnames 'namesleft :=
    { namesleft #0 > }
    { s nameptr
%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv>
%<!vonx>      "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{  ff{ }}{  jj{ }}"
%<vonx>      "{ll{ }}{  ff{ }}{  jj{ }}"
%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv>
%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv>
%<!vonx>      "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{  f{ }}{  jj{ }}"
%<vonx>      "{ll{ }}{  f{ }}{  jj{ }}"
%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv>
      format.name$ 't :=
      nameptr #1 >
        {
%<*nmlm>
%<m1>          nameptr #1
%<m2>          nameptr #2
%<m3>          nameptr #3
%<m4>          nameptr #4
%<m5>          nameptr #5
%<m6>          nameptr #6
%<m7>          nameptr #7
%<m8>          nameptr #8
%<m9>          nameptr #9
%<m0>          nameptr #0
%<m10>          #10 +
%<m20>          #20 +
%<m30>          #30 +
%<m40>          #40 +
%<m50>          #50 +
%<m60>          #60 +
%<m70>          #70 +
%<m80>          #80 +
%<m90>          #90 +
          #1 + =
%<x1>          numnames #1
%<x2>          numnames #2
%<x3>          numnames #3
%<x4>          numnames #4
%<x5>          numnames #5
%<x6>          numnames #6
%<x7>          numnames #7
%<x8>          numnames #8
%<x9>          numnames #9
%<x0>          numnames #0
%<x10>          #10 +
%<x20>          #20 +
%<x30>          #30 +
%<x40>          #40 +
%<x50>          #50 +
%<x60>          #60 +
%<x70>          #70 +
%<x80>          #80 +
%<x90>          #90 +
          > and
            { "others" 't :=
              #1 'namesleft := }
            'skip$
          if$
%</nmlm>
          "   "  *
          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
            { "zzzzz" * }
%<*seq-lab|seq-key>
            { numnames #2 > nameptr #2 = and
                { "zz" * year field.or.null * "   " * }
                'skip$
              if$
              t sortify *
            }
%</seq-lab|seq-key>
%<!seq-lab&!seq-key>            { t sortify * }
          if$
        }
        { t sortify * }
      if$
      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
    }
  while$
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.title'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
{ 't :=
  "A " #2
    "An " #3
      "The " #4 t chop.word
    chop.word
  chop.word
  sortify
  #1 global.max$ substring$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`author.sort'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {author.sort}
{ author empty$
    { key empty$
        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
          ""
        }
        { key sortify }
      if$
    }
    { author sort.format.names }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.sort'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
{ author empty$
    { editor empty$
        { key empty$
            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
              ""
            }
            { key sortify }
          if$
        }
        { editor sort.format.names }
      if$
    }
    { author sort.format.names }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`negate.year'}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add function for ordering by descending years}
% This function negates the year by substituting each digit by its
% complement. That is, 0 $\rightarrow$ 9, 1 $\rightarrow$ 8, etc. This is used
% to provide ordering by descending year (latest year first).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*seq-yrr&!seq-yr>
FUNCTION {negate.year}
{ year empty$
    { "99999" }
    { year #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$
      year #2 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
      year #3 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
      year #4 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
    }
    if$
}
%</seq-yrr&!seq-yr>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`editor.sort'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {editor.sort}
{ editor empty$
    { key empty$
        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
          ""
        }
        { key sortify }
      if$
    }
    { editor sort.format.names }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*seq-no>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { seq.num }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`init.seq'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {init.seq}
{ #0 'seq.num :=}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {init.seq}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`int.to.fix'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
  #-1 #10 substring$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</seq-no>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`presort'}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{seq-no} to author--year}
% For unsorted author--year, make up the final sorting order in
% \texttt{sort.label} with the original sequence number, for unsorting later.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {presort}
{ calc.label
  label sortify
  "    "
  *
%<*!seq-no>
  type$ "book" =
  type$ "inbook" =
  or
    'author.editor.sort
    { type$ "proceedings" =
        'editor.sort
        'author.sort
      if$
    }
  if$
  #1 entry.max$ substring$
%</!seq-no>
%<*seq-no>
  seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
  seq.num  int.to.fix
%</seq-no>
  'sort.label :=
  sort.label
  *
  "    "
  *
%<seq-yr>  "    " * year field.or.null *
%<seq-yrr&!seq-yr>  "    " * negate.year field.or.null *
%<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
  title field.or.null
  sort.format.title
%</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr>  cite$
  *
  #1 entry.max$ substring$
  'sort.key$ :=
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`author.organization.sort'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {author.organization.sort}
{ author empty$
    { organization empty$
        { key empty$
            { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$
              ""
            }
            { key sortify }
          if$
        }
        { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }
      if$
    }
    { author sort.format.names }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`editor.organization.sort'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort}
{ editor empty$
    { organization empty$
        { key empty$
            { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$
              ""
            }
            { key sortify }
          if$
        }
        { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }
      if$
    }
    { editor sort.format.names }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`presort'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {presort}
%<*alph>
{ calc.label
  sort.label
  "    "
  *
  type$ "book" =
%</alph>
%<!alph>{ type$ "book" =
  type$ "inbook" =
  or
    'author.editor.sort
    { type$ "proceedings" =
        'editor.organization.sort
        { type$ "manual" =
            'author.organization.sort
            'author.sort
          if$
        }
      if$
    }
  if$
%<alph>  *
  "    "
  *
%<seq-yrr>  negate.year field.or.null sortify
%<!seq-yrr>  year field.or.null sortify
%<!(seq-yr|seq-yrr)|alph>  *
  "    "
  *
%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!alph>  swap$ *
  title field.or.null
  sort.format.title
  *
  #1 entry.max$ substring$
  'sort.key$ :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
ITERATE {presort}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
SORT
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</ay|alph|!seq-no>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{`forward.pass'}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Include number of references in argument to
%     \texttt{thebibliography} environment}
% With version~6.0 of \texttt{natbib}, the author-year styles can also be
% used for numerical citations; then the \texttt{thebibliography} environment
% must have an argument indicating the length of the longest label.
% Simply count the references and add this number as the argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`initialize.extra.label.stuff'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
  "" 'next.extra :=
  #0 'last.extra.num :=
  #0 'number.label :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {forward.pass}
{ last.label label =
    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
    }
    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
      "" 'extra.label :=
      label 'last.label :=
    }
  if$
  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay&alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`initialize.longest.label'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}
{ "" 'longest.label :=
  #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label :=
  "" 'next.extra :=
  #0 'longest.label.width :=
  #0 'last.extra.num :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {forward.pass}
{ last.sort.label sort.label =
    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
    }
    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
      "" 'extra.label :=
      sort.label 'last.sort.label :=
    }
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`reverse.pass'}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Put extra label in braces}
% The extra label is added in braces so that natbib can treat it as one unit.
% This allows extra labels to be more than one letter long. For non-NFSS
% emphasizing, this is no problem, since labels go in |{\em a}|, but for
% non-emphasizing and for NFSS, it caused troubles without the braces.
% The trouble arises with multiple citations in one |\cite| in which
% authors and years are the same, and only the extra label is given for
% the next one. Note: |\emph{a}| is more than one letter long in this sense,
% so it is not just a problem for more than 26 papers with same authors and
% year.
%
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 17}{Add \texttt{\char`\\natexlab}}
% The command |\natexlab| now encloses the extra label for \texttt{natbib}
% styles. This command normally just prints its argument, but for numerical
% citation mode, it swallows its argument. This allows the extra labels to
% be suppressed for numerical citations where they are superfluous.
% The enclosing braces mentioned above must be included here to make the
% entire extra label text a single token for \texttt{natbib}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
{ next.extra "b" =
    { "a" 'extra.label := }
    'skip$
  if$
  extra.label 'next.extra :=
  extra.label
%<xlab-it>  emphasize
%<*!html>
  duplicate$ empty$
    'skip$
    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
  if$
%</!html>
  'extra.label :=
%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|cn)>  label extra.label * 'label :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay&alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
{ next.extra "b" =
    { "a" 'extra.label := }
    'skip$
  if$
  label extra.label * 'label :=
  label width$ longest.label.width >
    { label 'longest.label :=
      label width$ 'longest.label.width :=
    }
    'skip$
  if$
  extra.label 'next.extra :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<ay>EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
%<!ay&alph>EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay|alph>
ITERATE {forward.pass}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
REVERSE {reverse.pass}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</ay|alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {bib.sort.order}
{ sort.label
  "    "
  *
%<seq-yrr>  negate.year field.or.null sortify
%<!seq-yrr>  year field.or.null sortify
%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!(seq-lab|seq-key)>  swap$
  *
  "    "
  *
%<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
  title field.or.null
  sort.format.title
%</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr>  cite$
  *
  #1 entry.max$ substring$
  'sort.key$ :=
%<har|cay|nmd|cn|ast>  calc.short.label
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
ITERATE {bib.sort.order}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
SORT
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay&!alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS { longest.label }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width }
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}
{ "" 'longest.label :=
  #1 'number.label :=
  #0 'longest.label.width :=
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {longest.label.pass}
%<*!cite>
{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label :=
  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
%</!cite>
%<cite>{ cite$ 'label :=
  label width$ longest.label.width >
    { label 'longest.label :=
      label width$ 'longest.label.width :=
    }
    'skip$
  if$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
ITERATE {longest.label.pass}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&!alph>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`begin.bib'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{german}, add the definition of
%    {\tt\protect\bslash qq} to replace double-quote character.}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{babel}, read in file
% \texttt{babelbst.tex} in \texttt{thebibliography} to define the word
%  commands.}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Add number of references as argument}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: provide default meanings for procedures used.}
% The function \texttt{begin.bib} writes  the initial text to the \texttt{.bbl}
% file. The most important matter here is that the \texttt{thebibliography}
% environment is invoked.
%
% Note: the French quotation marks are called `guillimets'; Adobe erroneously
% named the symbols `guillimot', which is an arctic bird. The error has so
% propagated, that it can no longer be corrected. \LaTeX\ took it over.
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {begin.bib}
%<*!html>
%<*!ay&alph>
{ et.al.char.used
    { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ }
    'skip$
  if$
  preamble$ empty$
%</!ay&alph>
%<ay|!alph>{ preamble$ empty$
    'skip$
    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
  if$
%<ay>  "\begin{thebibliography}{" number.label int.to.str$ * "}" *
%<!ay>  "\begin{thebibliography}{"  longest.label  * "}" *
  write$ newline$
%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
 "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$
 "\typeout{WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING}" write$ newline$
 "\typeout{The bst file has been generated with inconsistent options}"
   write$ newline$
 "\typeout{Read the warning message at the start of the bst file}"
   write$ newline$
 "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$
%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
%<*!plntx>
%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s>  "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{`#1'}"
%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g>  "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{``#1''}"
%</!plntx>
%<*plntx>
%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s>  "\def\enquote#1{`#1'}"
%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g>  "\def\enquote#1{``#1''}"
%</plntx>
%<*!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g>
%<!plntx>  "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%"
%<plntx>  "\def\guillemotleft{%"
  write$ newline$
  "  \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}}"
  write$ newline$
%<!plntx>  "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%"
%<plntx>  "\def\guillemotright{%"
  write$ newline$
  "  \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}}"
  write$ newline$
%<!plntx>  "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}"
%<plntx>  "\def\enquote#1{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}"
%</!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g>
%<!tit-it&tit-qq>  write$ newline$
%<umlaut>  "\let\qq=\" quote$ * write$ newline$
%<em-ul>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname uline\endcsname\relax\let\uline\underline\fi"
%<em-ul>   write$ newline$
%<*ay>
%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\natexlab}[1]{#1}"
%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\def\natexlab#1{#1}\fi"
  write$ newline$
%<*har>
  "{\catcode`\|=0\catcode`\#=12\catcode`\@=11\catcode`\\=12" write$ newline$
  "|immediate|write|@auxout{\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\gdef\natexlab#1{#1}\fi}}"
  write$ newline$
%</har>
%</ay>
%<*nmft&nmft-def>
%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\bibnamefont}[1]{#1}"
%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibnamefont\endcsname\relax"
%<plntx>  write$ newline$
%<plntx>  "  \def\bibnamefont#1{#1}\fi"
  write$ newline$
%</nmft&nmft-def>
%<*nmft&fnm-def>
%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\bibfnamefont}[1]{#1}"
%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibfnamefont\endcsname\relax"
%<plntx>  write$ newline$
%<plntx>  "  \def\bibfnamefont#1{#1}\fi"
  write$ newline$
%</nmft&fnm-def>
%<*lab&lab-def>
%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\citenamefont}[1]{#1}"
%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname citenamefont\endcsname\relax"
%<plntx>  write$ newline$
%<plntx>  "  \def\citenamefont#1{#1}\fi"
  write$ newline$
%</lab&lab-def>
%<*(url&!harnm)|eprint>
%<*!plntx>
%<nfss>  "\providecommand{\url}[1]{\texttt{#1}}"
%<!nfss>  "\providecommand{\url}[1]{{\tt #1}}"
  write$ newline$
  "\providecommand{\urlprefix}{URL }"
  write$ newline$
%</!plntx>
%<*plntx>
  "\expandafter\ifx\csname url\endcsname\relax"
  write$ newline$
%<nfss>  "  \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}\fi"
%<!nfss>  "  \def\url#1{{\tt #1}}\fi"
  write$ newline$
  "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlprefix\endcsname\relax\def\urlprefix{URL }\fi"
  write$ newline$
%</plntx>
%</(url&!harnm)|eprint>
%<*doi>
  "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlstyle\endcsname\relax"
  write$ newline$
%<*!plntx>
  "  \providecommand{\doi}[1]{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\else"
  write$ newline$
  "  \providecommand{\doi}{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi"
  write$ newline$
%</!plntx>
%<*plntx>
  "  \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax"
  write$ newline$
  "  \def\doi#1{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\fi \else"
  write$ newline$
  "  \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax"
  write$ newline$
  "  \def\doi{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi \fi"
  write$ newline$
%</plntx>
%</doi>
%<*lang>
%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\selectlanguage}[1]{\relax}"
%<*plntx>
  "\expandafter\ifx\csname selectlanguage\endcsname\relax"
  write$ newline$
  "  \def\selectlanguage#1{}\fi"
%</plntx>
  write$ newline$
%</lang>
%<*!plntx>
%<*babel>
  "\input{babelbst.tex}" write$ newline$
  "\newcommand{\Capitalize}[1]{\uppercase{#1}}" write$ newline$
  "\newcommand{\capitalize}[1]{\expandafter\Capitalize#1}" write$ newline$
%</babel>
%<*annote>
  "\providecommand{\bibAnnoteFile}[1]{%"
  write$ newline$
  "  \IfFileExists{#1}{\begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\"
  write$ newline$
  "  \textsc{Annotation:}\ \input{#1}\end{quotation}}{}}"
  write$ newline$
  "\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[2]{%"
  write$ newline$
  "  \begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\"
  write$ newline$
  "  \textsc{Annotation:}\ #2\end{quotation}}"
  write$ newline$
%</annote>
%</!plntx>
%<*bibinfo>
%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}"
%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibinfo\endcsname\relax\def\bibinfo#1#2{#2}\fi"
  write$ newline$
%</bibinfo>
%<*eprint>
%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\eprint}[2][]{\url{#2}}"
%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname eprint\endcsname\relax\def\eprint#1{\url{#1}}\fi"
  write$ newline$
%</eprint>
}
%</!html>
%<*html>
{
"<html><head><title>Bibliography Listing</title></head>" write$ newline$
"<body>" write$ newline$
"<h2>Bibliography</h2>" write$ newline$
%<htdes>"<dl>" write$ newline$
%<!htdes&htlist>"<ol>" write$ newline$
}
%</html>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {begin.bib}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
ITERATE {call.type$}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`end.bib'}
%    \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {end.bib}
{ newline$
%<!html>  "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$
%<html>  "</dl></body></html>" write$ newline$
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {end.bib}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!head>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</!options&!driver&!bblbst>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{The File \texttt{babelbst.tex} for English}
% The following contains the definitions for the \texttt{babel} language
% selection as they apply to English. This file may be extracted with
% \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*bblbst>
 % This is babelbst.tex for English.
 % It should serve as a model for other languages.
 % Alternatively, store it under a different name (e.g. englbst.tex)
 % and then \input it with a command in babelbst.tex.
\def\bbland{and}                \def\bbletal{et~al.}
\def\bbleditors{editors}        \def\bbleds{eds.}
\def\bbleditor{editor}          \def\bbled{ed.}
\def\bbledby{edited by}
\def\bbledition{edition}        \def\bbledn{edn.}
\def\bblvolume{volume}          \def\bblvol{vol.}
\def\bblof{of}
\def\bblnumber{number}          \def\bblno{no.}
\def\bblin{in}
\def\bblpages{pages}            \def\bblpp{pp.}
\def\bblpage{page}              \def\bblp{p.}
\def\bbleidpp{pages}
\def\bblchapter{chapter}        \def\bblchap{chap.}
\def\bbltechreport{Technical Report}
\def\bbltechrep{Tech. Rep.}
\def\bblmthesis{Master's thesis}
\def\bblphdthesis{Ph.D. thesis}
\def\bblfirst{First}            \def\bblfirsto{1st}
\def\bblsecond{Second}          \def\bblsecondo{2nd}
\def\bblthird{Third}            \def\bblthirdo{3rd}
\def\bblfourth{Fourth}          \def\bblfourtho{4th}
\def\bblfifth{Fifth}            \def\bblfiftho{5th}
\def\bblst{st}  \def\bblnd{nd}  \def\bblrd{rd}
\def\bblth{th}
\def\bbljan{January}  \def\bblfeb{February}  \def\bblmar{March}
\def\bblapr{April}    \def\bblmay{May}       \def\bbljun{June}
\def\bbljul{July}     \def\bblaug{August}    \def\bblsep{September}
\def\bbloct{October}  \def\bblnov{November}  \def\bbldec{December}
%</bblbst>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \Finale